Home

User`s Manual - MyNikon.com.pl

1. 3 Recompose the photograph and shoot Focus will remain locked between shots as long as the shutter release button is kept pressed halfway allowing several photographs in succession to be taken at the same focus setting Focus will also remain locked between shots while the AE L AF L button is pressed Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject while focus lock is in effect If the subject moves focus again at the new distance See Also For information on choosing the role played by the AE L AF L button see Custom Setting f6 Assign AE L AF L button pg 306 69 70 Getting Good Results with Autofocus Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below The shutter release may be disabled if the camera is unable to focus under these conditions or the in focus indicator may be displayed and the camera may sound a beep allowing the shutter to be released even when the subject is not in focus In these cases use manual focus pg 71 or use focus lock pg 68 to focus on another subject at the same distance and then recompose the photograph J There is little or no contrast between the subject and the background Example subject is the same color as the background The focu
2. 4 Display printing options Press to display PictBridge printing options Setup Start printing Page size 4 Border 4 Time stamp ras Lz 237 5 Adjust printing options Setup Press A or W to highlight an ee ARTE option and press gt to select Time stamp Option Description Menu of page size options will be displayed pg 234 Press A or W to choose page size to print at default page size for current printer select Printer default then press to select and return to previous menu Menu of border options will be displayed pg 234 Press A or F to choose print style from Printer default Border default for current printer Print with border print photo with white border or No border then press to select and return to previous menu Menu of time stamp options will be displayed pg 234 Press A or W to choose Printer default default for current printer Print time stamp print time and date of recording on photo or No time stamp then press to select and return to previous menu Page size Time stamp 6 start printing Select Start printing and press to start printing To cancel before all copies have been printed press Page Size Border Time Stamp and Cropping Choose printer default to print at current printer settings Only options supported by the current printer can be
3. Print size in inches equals image size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch dpi 1 inch approximately 2 54 cm Print size decreases as printer resolution increases Image size can be set by pressing the QUAL button and rotating the sub command dial until the desired option is displayed in the control panel The Image Size Menu Image size can also be adjusted using the Image size option in the shooting menu pg 254 60 TORIR dial Control panel Focus Controlling How the Camera Focuses This section describes the options that control how your camera focuses FOCUS MOCGiecc cccssscececencssreecscscescsersescssstvesessascatesucesucsectonees pg 62 AFAreaMode cine ccccssceussentsvecessosestescssestscoscsesesseesenceceseseosees pg 64 Focus Point Selection s sscessssscosssessssscesereassseceseses pg 66 Focusi Lock oaeee nt EAEE REAA ASEA E EEan Er ESEE pg 68 Manual FOCUS ecccecscsscececerccssccssesessencsereessoseseetecscessesvectersa pg 71 61 62 Focus Mode Focus mode is controlled by the Focus mode selector focus mode selector on the front of the camera There are two autofocus AF modes in which the camera focuses automatically when the shutter release button is pressed halfway and one manual focus mode in which focus must be adjusted manually using the focusing ring on the lens Option Description
4. Aperture f number 04 Aperture number of stops 353 Exposure and flash bracketing increMeNnt seesecee 118 WB bracketing increment 122 Maximum aperture NON CPU lenses wucescsscsssessesseessesees 198 8 Camera battery indicato 44 9 MB D10 battery type display 287 MB D10 battery indicato 286 10 Shooting menu bank 11 Custom settings bank 12 Picture Control indicator 13 Color space indicator 14 Active D Lighting indicator 15 High ISO noise reduction INAICAtO kosis 263 16 Long exposure noise reduction indicator 17 Release mode single frame CONTINUOUS indicator wees 74 Continuous shooting speed 77 18 Exposure and flash bracketing indicator WB bracketing indicator 19 IMAGE SIZE escssescsessseseessconecesersseseensed 60 20 Electronic analog exposure 0 1 inisenisi 111 21 FV lock indicator cscs 179 22 ISO sensitivity indicator 94 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator 96 23 Exposure compensation INdICAtOF woe eeessssssssesecccssessssssessecceesensase 114 24 Flash compensation indicat t sessssecstrsessesetstrsscastseaesnocescastones 25 GPS connection indicator 26 Beep iNdiCator cessseesccceseeeseeeeee 27 Flash Mode csssssssssseessssccsssesssseeeesees 28 Multiple exposure indicator 186 29 K appears when memory
5. 1 Plug the charger in Insert the AC adapter plug into the battery charger and plug the power cable into an electrical outlet 2 Remove the terminal cover Remove the terminal cover from the battery 30 3 Insert the battery Insert the battery into the charger The CHARGE lamp will blink while the battery charges y NUA 38 CHARGE O eno N 4 Remove the battery when charging is complete Charging is complete when the CHARGE lamp stops blinking Remove the battery and unplug the charger 31 32 Insert the Battery 1 Turn the camera off Power switch Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing batteries iin 2 Open the battery chamber cover Open the battery chamber cover on the bottom of the camera 3 Insert the battery Insert the battery as shown at right 4 Close the battery chamber cover EE Removing the Battery Before removing the battery turn the camera off To prevent short circuits replace the terminal cover when the battery is not in use M The Battery and Charger Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages xviii xx and 379 382 of this manual To prevent short circuits replace the terminal cover when the battery is not in use Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0 C 32 F or above 40 C 104 F
6. Press the shutter release Cal button halfway to focus then v Cal press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to take the photograph 9 View the photograph pg 53 10 Delete unwanted photos pg 54 Press tt twice to delete the current photograph 22 Tutorial This section describes how to use the camera menus how to ready the camera for use and how to take your first pictures and play them back REEI E O E pg 30 Chargethe Battenyinscscccesatnceteres setters semen metres pg 30 Insert the Battery Ataca lens eoi ae de A ARRS ESAT A A E T terse INS rt A Manoy C ard usii a A E E pg 39 Format the Memory Card ccsssssssssscsssecessecsssecsnscessecsnseesnecesnseess pg 41 Adjust Viewfinder FOCUS scsccssecsssscsneccssecerstecesecsscecsnceesnecesnecesse pg 43 Basic Photography and Playback sccsssscscseseseees pg 44 Turnithe GameraiOnpecssccescssrc cesses pg 44 Adjust Camera Setting Seene eee Ae A E en pg 47 Readythe Cameraman meea e ee e RE AEE pg 50 RAS EINE ESI AON E o a A A G pg 51 Viewing PhotographS sssssssesssssssssssseeecessssssssesseeesessesssseeseeseesssssss pg 53 Deleting Unwanted Photographs ssscssscccssecsnsecsseceseeceseeees pg 54 23 24 Camera Menus Most shooting playback and setup options MENU button can be accessed from the camera menus To view the m
7. Coordinates Adjustment Increase green Green G i Blue B TO O7 Amber A Increase magenta Magenta M Increase blue q ________ _ Increase amber Press 8 Press to save settings and return to the shooting menu If white balance has been fine tuned on the A B axis a lt gt icon will be displayed in the control panel White Balance Fine Tuning The colors on the fine tuning axes are relative not absolute For example moving the cursor to B blue when a warm setting such as amp incandescent is selected for white balance will make photographs slightly colder but will not actually make them blue Mired Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color temperatures For example a change of 1000 K produces a much greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K Mired calculated by multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 106 is a measure of color temperature that takes such variation into account and as such is the unit used in color temperature compensation filters E g e 4000 K 3000 K a difference of 1000 K 83 mired e 7000 K 6000 K a difference of 1000 K 24 mired 131 132 Bi The WB Button At settings other than I Choose color temp and PRE Preset manual the WB button can be used to fine tune white balance on the amber
8. 2 Select Language Press MENU to display the camera menus then select Language in the setup menu For information on using menus see Using Camera Menus pg 26 SETUP MENU Format memory card LCD brightness s Clean image sensor Lock mirror up for cleaning Video mode HOMI World time 2 En 3 Selecta language E Lansuase De Deutsch Press A or W to highlight the Es Espa ol 7 Fi Suomi desired language and press Me Francais It Italiano NI Nederlands E Pi Polski 36 4 Select World time SETUP MENU Format memory card LCD brightness Select World time and press MEEN gt K N Lock mirror up for deaning Wl Video mode Hom El Language 5 Set time zone Date and time A time zone selection dialog Date format will be displayed Press lt or gt e to highlight the local time zone the UTC field shows the difference between the selected time zone and Coordinated Universal Time or UTC in hours and press 6 Turn daylight saving time E World time Daylight saving time on or off Daylight saving time options will be displayed Daylight saving time is off by default if daylight saving time is in effect in the local time zone press A to highlight On and press 7 Set the date and time E World time Date and time The dialog shown at right will be displayed Press lt or g
9. 2 Attach the lens Keeping the mounting mark on the lens aligned with the mounting mark on the camera body position the lens in the camera s bayonet mount Being careful not to press the lens release button rotate the lens counter clockwise until it clicks into place Mounting index If the lens is equipped with an A M or M A M switch select A autofocus or M A autofocus with manual priority 3 Remove the lens cap EE Detaching the Lens Be sure the camera is off when removing or exchanging lenses To remove the lens press and hold the lens release button while turning the lens clockwise After removing the lens replace the lens caps and camera body cap M CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings In the case of CPU lenses equipped with an aperture ring pg 352 lock aperture at the minimum setting highest f number See the lens manual for details Lens An AF S DX VR 18 200mm f 3 5 5 6G ED lens is used in this manual for illustrative purposes Mounting index Focal length Focal length index scale Focus mode switch pg 34 Lens cap CPU contacts pg 352 switch VR mode switch Zoom ring Focus ring pg 71 35 Basic Setup The language option in the setup menu is automatically highlighted the first time menus are displayed Choose a language and set the time and date 1 Turn the camera on Power switch cia
10. Exposure Bracketing The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture programmed auto aperture shutter priority auto or shutter speed aperture priority auto manual exposure mode When On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings gt ISO sensitivity auto control in shooting menu the camera will automatically vary ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits of the camera exposure system are exceeded Custom Setting e6 Auto bracketing mode M pg 298 can be used to change how the camera performs exposure and flash bracketing in manual exposure mode Bracketing can be performed by varying flash level together with shutter speed and or aperture or by varying flash level alone BE White Balance Bracketing 1 Select white balance bracketing GB 5 Auto bracketing set Choose WB bracketing for Custom lt o AEB fash Setting e5 Auto bracketing set ie pg 297 is WB_ WB bracketing Choose the number of shots Pressing the Fn button rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence The number of shots is shown in the control panel Te Number of shots Fn button Main command Control panel dial WB bracketing indicator At settings other than zero a icon and WB bracketing indicator will appear in the control panel 121 3 Select a white balance increment Pressing the Fn button rotate th
11. List previously saved AF tuning values If a value exists for the current lens it will be shown with a 1 icon To delete a lens from the list highlight the desired lens and press t To change a lens identifier for example to choose an identifier that is the same as the last two digits of the lens serial number to distinguish it from other lenses of the same type in light of the fact that Saved value List can be used with only one lens of each type highlight the saved desired lens and press P values The menu shown at right will be fey AF fine tune displayed press A or W to choose an PAN number identifier and press to save changes g F3 5 56 WR and exit a oti 00 99 Set DOK M AF Tuning The camera may be unable to focus at minimum range or at infinity when AF tuning is applied M Live View Tripod Mode Tuning is not applied to contrast detect autofocus when Tripod is selected in live view mode pg 83 Saved Value Only one value can be stored for each type of lens If a teleconverter is used separate values can be stored for each combination of lens and teleconverter Firmware Version View the current camera firmware version K The Retouch Menu Creating Retouched Copies The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed or retouched copies of the photographs on the memory card The retouch menu is only displayed when a memory card containing photographs is inserted in the came
12. Thumbnail on off f N Multi selector pg 301 Do nothing f w Photo info playback pg 301 Info Playback gt f4 Assign FUNC button pg 302 FUNC button press None FUNC button dials Auto bracketing Assign preview button pg 305 f5 Preview button press Preview Preview command dials None Assign AE L AF L button pg 306 f6 AE L AF L button press AE AF lock AE L AF L command dials None Customize command dials pg 307 Reverse rotation pg 307 No f7 Change main sub pg 307 Off Aperture setting pg 307 Sub command dial Menus and playback pg 308 Off f8 Release button to use dial pg 308 No f9 No memory card pg 309 Enable release 10 Reverse indicators pg 310 hehiiiniiis 404 Memory Card Capacity The following table shows the approximate number of pictures that can be stored on a 2 GB SanDisk Extreme III SDCFX card at different image quality and size settings Image quality Image size Filesize No of images Buffer capacity 2 NEF RAW Lossless compressed 12 bit g 136MB 7 1 NEF RAW Lossless compressed 14 bit 3 16 7 MB us 2 NEF RAW Compressed 12 bit E TISME 133 2l NEF RAW Compressed 14 2 MB 112 27 14 bit 3 NEF RAW Uncompressed 19 4 MB 98 17 12 bit NEF
13. 114 Exposure Compensation Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value suggested by the camera making pictures brighter or darker In exposure mode M only the exposure information shown in the electronic analog exposure display is affected shutter speed and aperture do not change To choose a value for exposure compensation press the 4 button and rotate the main command dial until the desired value is displayed in the control panel or viewfinder button 0 EV 4 button pressed Woo Siri a 23 0 3 EV Exposure compensation can be set to values between 5 EV underexposure and 5 EV overexposure in increments of 3 EV In general choose positive values to make the subject brighter negative values to make it darker 1EV No exposure 1EV compensation At values other than 0 the 0 at the center of the electronic analog exposure displays will flash and a 4 icon will be displayed in the control panel and viewfinder after you release the 4 button The current value for exposure compensation can be confirmed in the electronic analog exposure display by pressing the button Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to 0 Exposure compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off See Also For information on choosing the size of the increments available for exposure compensation see Custom Set
14. Active D Lighting versus D Lighting The Active D Lighting option in the shooting menu adjusts exposure before shooting to optimize the dynamic range while the D Lighting option in the retouch menu optimizes dynamic range in images after shooting Color Space The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color reproduction Choose a color space according to how photographs will be processed on leaving the camera Option Description sRGB sRGB default Choose for photographs that will be printed or used as is with no further modification Adobe Adobe RGB This color space is capable of expressing a wider gamut of colors than sRGB making it the preferred choice for images that will be extensively processed or retouched 1 Select Color space Highlight Color space in the shooting menu pg 254 and press gt SHOOTING MENU g White balance AUTO Set Picture Control 3S Manage Picture Control A CUETO W Active Hishting OFF Long ew NR OFF High ISO NR OFF E 150 sensitivity settings a 2 Selecta color space Highlight the desired option and press 167 168 Color Space Color spaces define the correspondence between colors and the numeric values that represent them in a digital image file The sRGB color space is widely used while the Adobe RGB color space is typically used in publishing and commercial printing sRGB is re
15. indicator appears in the viewfinder While exposure lock is in effect an AE L indicator will appear in the viewfinder Shutter release button 3 Recompose the photograph Keeping the AE L AF L button pressed recompose the photograph and shoot Metered Area In spot metering exposure will be locked at the value metered in a 3 mm 0 12 in circle centered on the selected focus point In center weighted metering exposure will be locked at the value metered in the center of the viewfinder the default area for center weighted metering is an 8 mm circle in the center of the viewfinder Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture While exposure lock is in effect the following settings can be changed without altering the metered value for exposure Exposure mode Settings P Shutter speed and aperture flexible program pg 105 5 Shutter speed A Aperture The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and control panel Note that the metering method can not be changed while exposure lock is in effect changes to metering take effect when the lock is released See Also If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 Shutter release button AE L pg 279 exposure will lock when the shutter release button is pressed halfway For information on changing the role of the AE L AF L button see Custom Setting f6 Assign AE L AF L button pg 306 113
16. 6 Takethe photograph Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to shoot If desired additional pictures can be taken without releasing FV lock 7 Release FV lock Press the Fn button to release FV lock Confirm that the FV lock icons m are no longer displayed in the control panel and viewfinder 179 180 m Using FV Lock with the Built in Flash FV lock is only available with the built in flash when TTL the default option is selected for Custom Setting e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash pg 291 Using FV Lock with Optional Flash Units FV lock is also available with SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 flash units available separately Set the optional flash to TTL mode the SB 900 and SB 800 can also be used in AA mode see the flash manual for details While FV lock is in effect flash output will automatically be adjusted for changes in flash zoom head position When Commander mode is selected for Custom Setting e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash pg 291 FV lock can be used with remote SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 flash units if a any of the built in flash flash group A or flash group B is in TTL mode or b a flash group is composed entirely of SB 900 and SB 800 flash units in TTL or AA mode Metering The metering areas for FV lock when using optional speedlight are as follows Speedlight Flash mode Metered area i TTL 4 mm circle in center
17. ISO button Main command dial Control panel 16 BE Exposure Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial to choose the exposure mode Choose the exposure mode pg 102 Use the command dials to adjust exposure Choosea combination of aperture and shutter speed exposure mode P pg 105 MODE button Main command dial P iz L ales Exposure mode F Main command dial Control panel Control panel Choose a shutter speed exposure mode S or M pp 106 110 az L wC Exposure mode 5or command dial Control panel Choose an aperture exposure mode A or M pp 107 110 aa Exposure mode Aor fi dial ETA TEMIA A Set exposure compensation pg 114 Activate or cancel bracketing select number of shots in bracketing sequence pp 117 120 Select bracketing q a exposure increment 2 A pg 118 FO Fn button a command dial Control panel Fn button Main command dial Control panel The Fn Button Depending on the option selected for Custom Setting f4 Assign FUNC button pg 302 the Fn button and command dials can be used to select shutter speed and aperture in steps of 1 EV to choose pre specified lens data for non CPU lenses or to select dynamic area AF The Depth of Field Preview and AE L AF
18. Shutter Priority Auto A Aperture Priority Auto ae o E E E AE E ts Autoexposure AE LOCK enres eaaet EEEa Aeres Exposure Compensation Bracketing eaer ae eA EAEEren rA earra r 99 Metering Metering determines how the camera sets exposure The following options are available Method Description t 3D color matrix II Recommended in most situations Camera meters a wide area of the frame and sets exposure according to distribution of brightness color distance and composition for natural results Center weighted Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest weight to area in center of frame defaults to 8 mm circle in center of viewfinder if CPU lens is attached area can be selected using Custom Setting b5 Center weighted area pg 277 Classic meter for portraits o E J Center weight area Spot Camera meters circle 3 mm 0 12 in in diameter approximately 2 of frame ra Circle is centered on current focus point making it possible to meter off k center subjects if non CPU lens is used or if Auto area AF is in effect pg 64 camera will meter center focus point Ensures that subject will be correctly exposed even when background is much brighter or darker a J Spot metering area 1 For improved precision with non CPU lenses specify lens focal length and maximum aperture i
19. pg 318 311 Format Memory Card Format the card Note that formatting permanently deletes all pictures and other data on the card Before formatting be sure to make backup copies as required m During Formatting Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards during formatting Two Button Format Memory cards can also be formatted by pressing the tt and MODE buttons for more than two seconds pg 41 LCD Brightness Press A or W to choose from seven settings Pomi for monitor brightness Choose higher values for increased brightness lower values for reduced brightness 312 Clean Image Sensor Select this option to remove dust from the image sensor or to choose options for automatic image sensor cleaning pg 373 Lock Mirror up for Cleaning Lock the mirror in the up position to allow inspection or manual cleaning of the low pass filter that protects the camera image sensor pg 376 Video Mode When connecting the camera to a television or VCR via the video connector be sure the camera video mode matches the device video standard NTSC or PAL 313 314 HDMI The camera is equipped with an HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface connector allowing pictures to be played back on high definition televisions or monitors using a type A cable available separately from commercial suppliers Before connecting the camera to high definition device choose the HDMI format from the options below
20. photographs in programmed auto 1 Select exposure mode F Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial until F is displayed in the viewfinder and control panel MODE button Shutter speed 1 320 s Aperture f 9 104 Flexible Program In exposure mode P different combinations of shutter speed and aperture can be selected by rotating the main command dial flexible program Rotate the command dial to the right for large apertures small f numbers that blur background details or fast shutter speeds that freeze motion Rotate the command dial tothe Main command dial left for small apertures large f numbers that increase depth of field or slow shutter speeds that blur motion All combinations produce the same exposure While flexible program is in effect an asterisk appears in the control panel To restore default shutter speed and aperture settings rotate the command dial until the asterisk is no longer displayed choose another mode or turn the camera off B Ba FS gt imam E772 54 i my NORM Shutter speed 1 2 500 s Shutter speed 1 60 s Aperture f 2 8 Aperture f 22 See Also See page 407 for information on the built in exposure program 105 106 5 Shutter Priority Auto In shutter priority auto you choose the shutter speed while the camera automatically
21. vibration reduction 4 9 Flash MOde esseesseeeees ee Flash compensation 10 Commander mode group name flash control mode flash COMPENSATION eessessssescssessees 293 11 Camera name 12 Folder number frame NUMDEL ccceesseesseeseeseees 258 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode pg 250 Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on Displayed if Custom Setting b6 Fine tune optimal exposure pg 277 has been set to a value other than zero for any metering method Displayed only if VR lens is attached 211 212 OBWDN E Shooting Data Page 2 COLOR SPACE PICTURE CNTRL QUICK ADJUST SHARPENING CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS SATURATION HUE SSSSUS 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 1 1 1 Protect status 2 Retouch indicator 3 White balance Color temperature White balance fine tuning 129 Preset MaNUAl cessccssseeeceeeeee 134 4 COlOr SPACE wees essesessessssescesssesecs 167 5 Picture Control ou eessssseseceeeeee 148 6 Quick adjust 2 Original Picture Control 148 WHITE BALANCE AUTO 0 0 sRGB STANDARD 7 SHAarPening eeescsssesecsccsseeesseesses 8 Contrast 9 BriQghtess sssssesssccssseesseesseeees 10 Saturation 4 csessssseeesssereen TONING sss cscsssccstavnadesectssciseveantecoet 12 Camera name 13 Folder number frame number Displayed only if Data is selected for Display model
22. wraps around from one edge of the viewfinder to another Option Description Wrap around from top to bottom bottom to top right to left and left onr to right so that for example pressing when a focus point at the right edge of the viewfinder display is highlighted D selects the corresponding focus point at the left edge of the display Focus point selection wraps oar TETEN oa 2 0 No wrap default The focus area display is bounded by the outermost focus points so that for example pressing when a focus point at the right edge of the display is selected has no effect a8 AF Point Selection Choose the number of focus points available for manual focus point selection Option Description Choose from the 51 focus points shown at right 51 points g oss8 eae 8989 AF51 0000000 oooo default eae 200 29000 Choose from the 11 focus points shown at right Use for quick re 2 a AF11 11 points focus point selection loo o oo e o 2 272 a9 Built in AF assist Illuminator Choose whether the built in AF assist illuminator lights to assist the focus operation when lighting is poor Option Description On default The AF assist illuminator lights when lighting is poor AF assist illumination is only available when both of the following conditions are met 1 Single servo autofocus is selected for fo
23. 133 Preset Manual Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for light sources with a strong color cast Two methods are available for setting preset white balance Method Description Neutral gray or white object is placed under lighting that will be used in final photograph and white balance is measured by camera pg 136 Direct measurement Copy from existing White balance is copied from photo on memory photograph card pg 140 134 The camera can store up to five values for preset white balance in presets d 0 through d 4 A descriptive comment can be added to any white balance preset pg 144 d 0 Stores last value measured for white balance pg 136 This preset is overwritten when a new value is measured ESS d 1 d 4 Store values copied from d 0 pg 139 Store values copied _ 7 ty White balance from images on iG Select image memory card pg 140 White Balance Presets Changes to white balance presets apply to all shooting menu banks pg 255 A confirmation dialog will be displayed if the user attempts to change a white balance preset created in another shooting menu bank no warning is displayed for preset d 0 135 136 EE Measuring a Value for White Balance 1 Light a reference object Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will be used in
24. 9 to copy the photograph Increase amount of green Increase ce Increase amount of lt e amount of blue amber Increase amount of magenta Creating JPEG Copies of NEF RAW Pictures To create a JPEG copy of an NEF RAW picture select the NEF RAW picture for Color balance and press without modifying color balance The JPEG copy will have an image quality of fine and a size of L 338 Image Overlay Image overlay combines two existing NEF RAW photographs to create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals with results that are noticeably better than photographs combined in an imaging application because they make use of RAW data from the camera image sensor The new picture is saved at current image quality and size settings before creating an overlay set image quality and size pp 56 60 all options are available To create a NEF RAW copy choose an image quality of NEF RAW 1 Select Image overlay E imase overlay Image 1 Image2 Preview Highlight Image overlay in the retouch menu and press P The dialog shown at right will j a be displayed with Image 1 Xx Dom Wiselect highlighted Display NEF RAW images imase overlay Image 1 Press A picture selection dialog will be displayed Zoom Highlight a photograph i Image overlay Image 1 Press AW lt 4 or P to highlight SON the first photograph in the RN ae overlay To view
25. Battery NfO senienas Wireless Transmitter Image Authentication Copyright Information Non CPU Lens Data AF Fine Tune Firmware Version ssessssssssessssessssssssesssessssessesssssessseesssessseesssees K The Retouch Menu Creating Retouched Copies 329 D LIQHting e ssssccssssecssesccessccssssecccsneccessscesenseesees 334 Red Eye Correction 335 TUM PEPEE S ET PE ET E 336 xvi Monochrome Filter Effects sccisssisiccsasssessccossnssosoconsioosdatsssndeasisecadvssasnssssssassensatovs Color Balance Image Overlay Side by Side COMPALISON sssssscsssscesstsecesseseceneecesseeeeenseees 342 i My Menu Creating a Custom MenU ssssssssssssssssssssssrssssssssssss 344 Technical Notes 349 Compatible Lenses ceesssssssssecsssecsssccssscesseccsseecsscceesceesneecsueessneessees 350 Optional Flash Units Speedlights sssssssssssssssssssssssessesssssssss 357 Other ACCESSOFICS ccscsssecsssecsseessssecsescsssecesseecescessseesasecesnceesneesnseessecs 365 Caring for the Camera e sssesccsssscsesscsssesccssesscssseeccseescensseecnseeesesees 372 SHOTAQG ss ssasscscssssedccvssaratazsssavascaneteeatascayactuesenssavasiqasessudsebaussuavcanesntarnaes 372 GIO A MING isstersesacecetictecagansdecdnreciiannasnatoniariantcnaicnamnncaaavnarut 372 The LOW PaSs Filter ssssssssssccssssscsssecesssseccsseesssseeecsneeessneeesnseesse 373 Clean NOW secsssssssnsescdsy
26. Camera focuses when shutter release button is pressed 5 halfway Focus locks when in focus indicator appears am ren in viewfinder and remains locked while shutter release g AF button is pressed halfway focus lock At default settings shutter can only be released when in focus indicator is displayed focus priority Camera focuses continuously while shutter release button c is pressed halfway If subject moves camera will engage Continuos predictive focus tracking pg 63 to predict final distance to cervo AF subject and adjust focus as necessary At default settings shutter can be released whether or not subject is in focus release priority Camera does not focus automatically focus must be M adjusted manually using the lens focusing ring If Manual maximum aperture of lens is f 5 6 or faster viewfinder 0g 71 focus indicator can be used to confirm focus electronic p9 range finding pg 72 but photographs can be taken at any time whether or not subject is in focus Choose single servo AF for landscapes and other stationary sub jects Continuous servo AF may be a better choice with erratically moving subjects Manual focus is recommended when the camera is unable to focus using autofocus The AF 0N Button For the purpose of focusing the camera pressing AF ON button the AF ON button has the same effect as pressing the shutter release button halfway Predictive Focus Tracking In conti
27. E Auto gain the control panel To exit without taking a multiple exposure select Multiple exposure gt Reset in the shooting menu X Ja fy Multiple exposure a Y Frame a photograph focus and shoot 7 In continuous high speed and continuous low e speed release modes pg 74 the camera records all exposures in a single burst In single frame release mode one photograph will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed continue shooting until all exposures have been recorded for information on interrupting a multiple exposure before all photographs are recorded see page 188 The icon will blink until shooting 125 AEV ends When shooting ends multiple cl 7 New exposure mode will end and the icon fC E will no longer be displayed Repeat steps 1 7 to take additional multiple exposures m Multiple Exposure Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple exposure Live view pg 79 can not be used to record multiple exposures The information listed in the playback photo information display including date of recording and camera orientation is for the first shot in the multiple exposure If no operations are performed for 30 s after the monitor has turned off during playback or menu operations shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to that point Interval Timer Photography If int
28. MB D10 Approximately 6000 shots One EN EL3e and one EN EL4a battery MB D10 Approximately 8900 shots Eight AA batteries MB D10 Approximately 2500 shots 1 Measured at 23 C 73 4 F 2 C 3 6 F with an AF S VR 24 120mm f 3 5 5 6G ED lens under the following test conditions lens cycled from infinity to minimum range and one photograph taken at default settings once every 30 s flash fired once every other shot Live view not used 2 Measured at 20 C 68 F with an AF S VR 70 200mm f 2 8G ED lens under the following test conditions image quality set to JPEG basic image size set to M medium shutter speed 250 s shutter release button pressed halfway for three seconds and focus cycled from infinity to minimum range three times six shots are then taken in succession and monitor turned on for five seconds and then turned off cycle repeated once exposure meters have turned off 417 418 The following can reduce battery life Using the monitor e Keeping the shutter release button pressed halfway e Repeated autofocus operations e Taking NEF RAW or TIFF RGB photographs e Slow shutter speeds e Using the optional WT 4 wireless transmitter Using the optional GP 1 GPS unit e Using VR vibration reduction mode with VR lenses To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN EL3e batteries e Keep the battery contacts clean Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance e Use batteries immediatel
29. RAW Uncompressed 25 3 MB 75 16 14 bit 3 L 36 5 MB 52 16 TIFF RGB M 21 2 MB 93 20 S 10 2 MB 208 29 L 5 8 MB 276 43 JPEG fine 4 M 3 3 MB 488 89 S 1 5 MB 1000 100 L 2 9 MB 548 90 JPEG normal 4 M 1 6 MB 946 100 S 0 7 MB 2000 100 L 1 5 MB 1000 100 JPEG basic 4 M 0 8 MB 1800 100 S 0 4 MB 3900 100 405 All figures are approximate File size varies with scene recorded 2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 200 Drops if Optimal quality is selected for JPEG compression ISO sensitivity is set to H 5 3 or higher High ISO NR is on when auto ISO sensitivity control is on or ISO sensitivity is set to 800 or higher or long exposure noise reduction active D lighting or image authentication is on 3 Maximum frame rate when recording 14 bit NEF RAW images is 2 5 fps 4 Figures assume JPEG compression is set to Size priority Selecting Optimal quality increases the file size of JPEG images number of images and buffer capacity drop accordingly d5 Max Continuous Release pg 282 The maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst can be set to any amount between 1 and 100 406 Exposure Program The exposure program for programmed auto is shown in the following graph ISO 200 lens with maximum aperture of f 1 4 and minimum aperture of f 16 e g AF 50mm f 1 4 D raw noryssrnoor ve one t1 f 1 4 f 2 2 8 f 4 5
30. This chapter covers information you will need to know before using the camera including the names of camera parts OVENVICWeooccscssceccesscusscsesstcatectesccsresscestecsesczecectsecesccstccesenets pg 2 Getting to Know the Camera essesssscscsecscsscssososcoscososeos pg 3 Camera BOY aean a EAT A A AEA pg 3 The GontroliPamelfeee ccascccseseccrcecose nesses seers pg 8 The Viewfinder Display ssccsssccsssccnssscssscsseccsseceseecsnecesseeessees pg 10 The Shooting Information Display sscccsssecsseccssecessecsneeeenes pg 12 The Command Dials 0 eessssesscnssssecssececrsseccessececssececesseeensseeecsnecs pg 14 QUICK Start GUIDE Aevcccecsosesecccestscsestecesersoscesecterencesceereesss pg 21 Overview Thank you for your purchase of a Nikon single lens reflex SLR digital camera Please be sure to read all instructions thoroughly to get the most from the camera and keep them where they will be read by all those who use the product M Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with your Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within its operational and safety requirements THE USE OF NON NIKON ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON WARRANTY m Servicing the Camera and Accessories The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing Nikon recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retai
31. USB menu and select MTP PTP pg 225 Y t Mass Storage Turn the camera off 3 Connect the USB cable Turn the printer on and connect the USB cable as shown Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle 4 Turn the camera on 232 A welcome screen will be displayed in the monitor followed by a PictBridge playback display A DWSetup PictBridge EH Printing Pictures One at a Time 1 Selecta picture Press lt or P to view additional pictures or press the amp button to zoom in on the current frame pg 220 To view six pictures at a time press the 9 button Use the multi selector to highlight pictures or press amp to display the highlighted picture full frame 2 Display printing options Press to display PictBridge printing options Setup Start printing OX Page size aA No of copies 1 Border 4 Time stamp Z a Cropping 233 3 Adjust printing options Press A or W to highlight an option and press gt to select Option Description Menu shown at right will be z Page size displayed Press A or to choose page size to print at wns Page size default page size for current Ad printer select Printer default then press to select and return to previous menu Menu shown at righ
32. i TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 200 and 3200 At values over 3200 the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings If the flash ready indicator blinks for about three seconds after a photograph is taken the flash has fired at full power and the photograph may be underexposed The SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SB 400 provide red eye reduction in red eye reduction and red eye reduction with slow sync modes while the SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SU 800 provide AF assist illumination when the conditions for AF assist illumination are met With other flash units the camera AF assist illuminator is used for AF assist illumination When used with AF lenses with focal lengths of 17 135 mm the SB 900 provides AF assist illumination active AF assist illumination for all focus points note however that autofocus is available only with the following focus points 888550838 0899 000 8820 8 17 19 mm 229000000 20 105 mm 2220 0090000 106 135 mm 20000000000 See 0992098 p00 099000 o When used with AF lenses with focal lengths of 24 105 mm the SB 800 SB 600 and SU 800 provide AF assist illumination to assist autofocus for the following focus points 24 34 mm 35 49mm gt o 50 105mm gt 00000 00000 o0000 00000 00000 00000 00000 o o In programmed auto the maximum aperture minimum f number is limited according to sensitivity ISO equivalency as shown below M
33. or the shutter can be held open indefinitely for a long time exposure tush i Pg 111 Aperture can be set to values between the minimum and maximum values for the lens Check exposure in the electronic analog exposure displays see page 111 and continue to adjust shutter speed and aperture until the desired exposure is achieved Sub command dial 250 45 i Ce Setting C se ao aperture ZA Setting shutter aes speed Cae Main command dial 3 Framea photograph focus and shoot Shutter speed 1 250 s Aperture f 8 s AF Micro Nikkor Lenses Provided that an external exposure meter is used the exposure ratio need only be taken into account when the lens aperture ring is used to set aperture Electronic Analog Exposure Displays The electronic analog exposure displays in the control panel and viewfinder show whether the photograph would be under or over exposed at current settings Depending on the option chosen for Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl pg 275 the amount of under or over exposure is shown in increments of 3 EV 1 2 EV or 1 EV If the limits of the exposure metering system are exceeded the displays will flash Custom Setting b2 set to 1 3 step Optimal exposure Underexposed by 3 EV Overexposed by over 2 EV Control panel fara cinie afnievs porerne a resres goen ob iii ot Viewfinder ahas Long Time E
34. pg 56 JPEG normal Shooting Image size pg 60 L menu White balance pg 126 Auto Fine tuning pg 129 Off Choose color temp pg 133 5000 K Focus point pg 66 Center Exposure mode pg 102 Programmed auto Flexible program pg 105 Off AE lock hold pg 112 Off Other Exposure compensation pg 114 Off settings Flash compensation pg 176 Off Bracketing pg 116 Off Flash mode pg 174 Front curtain sync FV lock pg 178 Off Multiple exposure pg 184 Off 1 If the current Picture Control has been modified existing settings for the Picture Control will also be restored 2 Only the settings in the bank currently selected using the Shooting menu bank option will be reset pg 255 Settings in all other banks are unaffected 400 EE Defaults Restored with Reset Shooting Menu pg 257 Option Default File naming pg 260 DSC Image quality pg 56 JPEG normal Image size pg 60 Large JPEG compression pg 58 Size priority NEF RAW recording pg 58 Lossless Type compressed NEF RAW bit depth 12 bit White balance pg 126 Auto Fine tuning pg 129 off Choose color temp pg 133 5000 K Set Picture Control pg 146 Standard Color space pg 167 sRGB Active D lighting pg 166 off Long exp NR pg 262 off High ISO NR pg 263 Normal ISO sensitivity settings pg 94 I
35. remains for over 1000 EXPOSUTES csssescseecessseccnssecenececsneeseneccee 45 30 Number of exposures remaining Manual lens number 31 White balance secs White balance fine tuning indicator 32 Auto area AF indicator Focus points indicator AF area mode indicator 3D tracking indicator 33 Image quality eessssssccccsseeseeenseeee 34 Copyright information s s s 35 Interval timer indicator 006 36 Image comment indicator 37 Clock not set indicator 13 The Command Dials The main and sub command dials are used alone or in combination with other controls to adjust a variety of settings Ni Fn button Bracketing button Flash mode Flash KA compensation Sub command dial QUAL button Image BA button quality size Gy Exposure compensation WB button LJ MODE button White SS Exposure balance mode ISO button isO Main command dial sensitivity 14 EE mage Quality and Size Press the QUAL button and rotate the command dials Set image quality pg 57 L 544 Control panel Choose animage 777 size pg 60 Sub command dial Control panel Press the ISO button and rotate the main command dial Es QUAL button EE SO Sensitivity Set ISO sensitivity pg 94 Se ai Ane
36. vq 2785 1 50 Option Description Output Choose flash output expressed as a fraction of full power Choose the number of times the flash fires at the selected output Note that depending on shutter speed and the option selected for Frequency the actual number of flashes may be less than selected Times Frequency Choose how often the flash fires per second Times The options available for Times are determined by flash output Output Options available for Times 1 4 2 1 8 2 5 1 16 2 10 1 32 2 10 15 1 64 2 10 15 20 25 1 128 2 10 15 20 25 30 35 BE Commander Mode Use the built in flash as a master flash controlling one or more remote optional SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 flash units in up to two groups A and B using advanced wireless lighting Selecting this option displays the menu a 3 Flash entri for built in flash shown at right Press lt or to highlight the iii following options A or W to change By Built in flash Group A Group B Channel Move Option Description Built in Par flash Choose a flash mode for the built in flash commander flash TTL i TTL mode Choose flash compensation from values between 3 0 and 3 0 EV in increments of 3 EV M Choose the flash level from values between Full and 1 128 1 128 of full power The built in flash does not fire but the AF
37. 1 GPS unit or GPS device compliant with NMEA0183 version 2 01 or 3 01 requires optional MC 35 GPS adapter cord and cable with D sub 9 pin connector Supported languages Supported languages Chinese Simplified and Traditional Dutch English Finnish French German Italian Japanese Korean Polish Portuguese Russian Spanish Swedish Power source Battery One rechargeable Li ion EN EL3e battery Battery pack Optional MB D10 multi power battery pack with one rechargeable Nikon EN EL3e EN EL4a or EN EL4 Li ion battery or eight AA alkaline NiMH lithium or nickel manganese batteries EN EL4a EN EL4 and AA batteries available separately A BL 3 battery chamber cover is required when using EN EL4a or EN EL4 batteries AC adapter EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter available separately Tripod socket Tripod socket 1 4 in ISO 1222 Dimensions weight Dimensions WxHxD Approx 147 x 114 x 74 mm 5 8 x 4 5 x 2 9 in Weight Approx 825 g 1 82 lb without battery memory card body cap or monitor cover Operating environment Temperature 0 40 C 32 104 F Humidity Less than 85 no condensation e Unless otherwise stated all figures are for a camera with a fully charged battery operating at an ambient temperature of 20 C 68 F e Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in this manual at any time and withou
38. 109 Aperture number Of STOPS sseecseeecsees 353 10 Exposure mode 11 Flash compensation indicator oes essseeecsssecccssescesseceessees 176 12 Exposure compensation indicator oe esseeeesssssecccsseccesseccessees 114 13 ISO sensitivity ou es esessseeeseeeene 94 M No Battery 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Number of exposures TEMAINING sesssesssecseccscennsensecseeeee 45 Number of shots remaining before memory buffer fills 51 77 White balance recording indicatoren 137 Exposure compensation VAU Eisirein 114 Flash compensation value 176 PC mode indicator 227 Flash ready indicatov 171 FV lock indicator ou 179 Flash sync indicator sis Aperture stop indicato 353 Electronic analog exposure display A ere 111 Exposure compensation 0 A ere 114 Auto ISO sensitivity TCI CATON eesessseessccssseesersnsseeceenene 96 K appears when memory remains for over 1000 EXPOSULES sessssesssccsscssccesecsseeseeess 45 When the battery is totally exhausted or no battery is inserted the display in the viewfinder will dim This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction The viewfinder display will return to normal when a fully charged battery is inserted I The Control Panel and Viewfinder Displays The brightness of the control panel and viewfinder displays varies with temperature and the response times of the displays may drop at low tempe
39. 171 179 sync speed 106 288 289 sync terminal 364 Flash cntrl for built in flash 291 Commander mode 293 Manual 292 Repeating flash 292 Flash shutter speed 290 Flash sync speed 288 Flexible program 105 Fn button 117 121 179 302 f number 107 108 352 Focal length 196 354 Focal length scale 35 Focal plane mark 72 Focus 61 62 64 66 68 71 autofocus 62 64 66 70 contrast detect 79 84 86 phase detection 79 electronic rangefinder 72 350 indicator 51 72 lock 68 mode 62 continuous servo AF 62 69 267 269 manual 62 71 81 single servo AF 62 68 268 point 64 66 84 250 269 272 contrast detect 84 tracking 63 270 3D 64 270 predictive 62 63 Focus point wrap around 272 Focus tracking with lock on 270 Focusing screen 410 Format 41 312 Format memory card 312 Front curtain sync 174 FV lock 178 G GPS 199 GPS 199 215 connecting 200 data 201 215 unit 199 GPS data 215 H HDMI 314 HDMI 244 416 Help 24 29 HI 95 Hide image 249 High definition 244 314 416 High ISO NR 263 Highlights 208 250 Histogram 209 210 250 l Image authentication 323 Image comment 316 Image Dust Off 318 Image file 416 Image overlay 339 Image quality 56 Image quality 56 Image review 251 Image size 60 Image size 60 Index print 239 In focus indicator 51 62 Information 206 250 421 Menu items and optio
40. 315 Image Comment Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken Comments can be viewed in ViewNX version 1 2 0 or later or in Capture NX version 1 3 5 or later or Capture NX 2 version 2 1 0 or later available separately pg 368 The comment is also visible on the third shooting data page in the photo information display e Done Save changes and return to the setup menu e Input comment Input a comment as described on page 256 Comments can be up to 36 characters long e Attach comment Select this option to BS imase comment attach the comment to all subsequent photographs Attach comment can be Dene turned on and off by highlighting it and ar pressing gt 2 316 Auto Image Rotation Photographs taken while On the default option is selected contain information on camera orientation allowing them to be rotated automatically during playback pg 251 or when viewed in ViewNxX version 1 2 0 or later or in Capture NX version 1 3 5 or later or Capture NX 2 verson 2 1 0 or later available separately pg 368 The following orientations are recorded Landscape wide Camera rotated 90 Camera rotated 90 orientation clockwise counter clockwise Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected Choose this option when taking photographs with the lens pointing up or down M Auto Image Rotation In continuous mode pg 74 the orientation recorded for the first shot applies to
41. 4 that the battery has reached the end of its charging life and should be replaced Note that batteries charged at temperatures under about 5 C 41 F may show a temporary drop in charging life the charging life display will however return to normal once the battery has been recharged at a temperature of about 20 C 68 F or higher 321 The MB D10 Battery Pack The information displayed when the camera is Battery info powered by an optional MB D10 battery pack Dee woon depends on the type of batteries used y Piemeter 209 143 i Charging life 0 0 4 Toy a w i GHDone Bat meter Pic meter Calibration Charging life EN EL3e Vv Vv si Vv EN EL4a EN EL4 option Y Yv Y Y 8 x AA option Y Wireless Transmitter This option is used to adjust settings for connection to a wireless network using an optional WT 4 wireless transmitter See Connections Wireless and Ethernet Networks pg 229 322 Image Authentication Choose whether to embed image authentication information in new photographs as they are taken allowing alterations to be detected using Nikon s optional Image Authentication software Image authentication information can not be embedded in existing photographs Photographs taken with image authentication on are marked with a fg icon on the file information and overview pages of the photo information display pp 207 217 Option Description ON On
42. 4 Matrix or center weighted metering 0 20 EV lens 20 C 68 F Spot metering 2 20 EV v Exposure meter coupling Combined CPU and Al Exposure mode Programmed auto with flexible program FP shutter priority auto S aperture priority auto A manual M Exposure compensation 5 5 EV in increments of 1 3 2 or 1 EV 411 412 Exposure Exposure bracketing 2 9 frames in steps of 1 3 1 2 2 3 or 1 EV Flash bracketing 2 9 frames in steps of 1 3 2 2 3 or 1 EV White balance 2 9 frames in steps of 1 2 or 3 bracketing Exposure lock Luminosity locked at detected value with AE L AF L button ISO sensitivity Recommended Exposure Index ISO 200 3200 in steps of 3 2 or 1 EV Can also be set to approx 0 3 0 5 0 7 or 1 EV ISO 100 equivalent below ISO 200 or to approx 0 3 0 5 0 7 or 1 EV ISO 6400 equivalent above ISO 3200 Active D Lighting Can be selected from High Normal or Low Focus Autofocus Nikon Multi CAM 3500DX autofocus sensor module with TTL phase detection fine tuning 51 focus points including 15 cross type sensors and AF assist illuminator range approx 0 5 3 m 1 ft 8 in 9 ft 10 in Detection range 1 19 EV ISO 100 20 C 68 F Lens servo Autofocus Single servo AF S continuous servo AF 0 predictive focus tracking automatically activated according to subject status Manu
43. 60 s 1 60 s the default setting to 30 s 30 s e3 Flash Cntrl for Built in Flash Choose the flash mode for the built in flash Option Description Ts TTL Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to default shooting conditions M Manual Choose the flash level pg 292 RPT Repeating The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is open flash producing a strobe light effect pg 292 Cb Commander Use the built in flash as a master flash controlling mode one or more remote optional flash units pg 293 Manual and Repeating Flash icons blink in the control panel and viewfinder when these options are selected The SB 400 When an optional SB 400 flash unit is attached Sy 3 Optional flash and turned on Custom Setting e3 changes to i Optional flash allowing the flash control mode s aT for the SB 400 to be selected from TTL and a er naan Manual Repeating flash and Commander mode options are not available 291 292 BE Manual Choose a flash level between Full and 1 128 1 128 of full power At full power the built in flash has a Guide Number of 18 59 m ft ISO 200 20 C 68 F BE Repeating Flash The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter 3 Flash ente for builtin flash Repeating flash is open producing a strobe light effect Output Times Frequency Press lt or P to highlight the following en options A or W to change E vw
44. AF 80mm Non Al lenses f 2 8 AF 200mm f 3 5 ED e Lenses that require the AU 1 AF Teleconverter TC 16 focusing unit 400mm f 4 5 600mm_ PC 28mm f 4 serial number 180900 f 5 6 800mm f 8 1200mm f 11 or earlier Fisheye 6mm f 5 6 7 5mm f 5 6 PC 35mm f 2 8 serial numbers 8mm f 8 OP 10mm f 5 6 851001 906200 2 1cm f 4 PC 35mm f 3 5 old type e Extension Ring K2 Reflex 1000mm f 6 3 old type 180 600mm f 8 ED serial numbers Reflex 1000mm f 11 serial numbers 174041 174180 142361 143000 360 1200mm f 11 ED serial Reflex 2000mm f 11 serial numbers numbers 174031 174127 200111 200310 200 600mm f 9 5 serial numbers 280001 300490 Lens f number The f number given in lens names is the maximum aperture of the lens Recognizing CPU and Type G and D Lenses CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts type G and D lenses by a letter on the lens barrel Type G lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring CPU contacts Aperture ring CPU lens Type Glens Type D lens The AF S AF I Teleconverter The AF S AF I teleconverter can be used with the following AF S and AF lenses AF S VR Micro 105mm f 2 8G ED AF S 500mm f 4D ED 2 AF S VR 200mm f 2G ED AF I 500mm f 4D ED 2 AF S VR 300mm f 2 8G ED e AF S 600mm f 4D ED II 2 AF S 300mm f 2 8D ED II AF S 600mm f 4D ED 2 AF S 300mm f 2 8D ED AF I 600mm f 4D ED 2 AF I1 300mm f 2 8D
45. Charge indoors at ambient temperatures in the vicinity of 5 35 C 41 95 F for best results charge the battery at temperatures above 20 C 68 F Battery capacity may temporarily drop if the battery is charged at low temperatures or used at a temperature below the temperature at which it was charged If the battery is charged at a temperature below 5 C 41 F the battery life indicator in the Battery info pg 321 display may show a temporary decrease The battery may be hot immediately after use Wait for the battery to cool before recharging Use the charger with compatible batteries only Unplug when not in use m Incompatible Batteries The D300 can not be used with EN EL3 or EN EL3a rechargeable Li ion batteries for the D100 D70 series or D50 or with the MS D70 CR2 battery holder EN EL3e Rechargeable Li ion Batteries The supplied EN EL3e shares information with compatible devices enabling the camera to show battery charge state in six levels pg 44 The Battery info option in the setup menu details battery charge battery life and the number of pictures taken since the battery was last charged pg 321 33 34 Attach a Lens Care should be taken to prevent dust from entering the camera when the lens is removed T Remove the rear lens cap and the camera body cap After confirming that the camera is off remove the rear lens cap from the lens and remove the camera body cap
46. DCF version 2 0 168 416 Default settings 182 257 266 400 restoring 182 257 266 Delete 248 AIl 248 Selected 248 Delete 54 222 248 all images 248 current image 54 222 selected images 248 Depth of field 103 Depth of field preview button 103 297 305 Digital Print Order Format 230 236 240 416 Diopter 43 366 adjustment control 43 Display mode 250 D Lighting 334 DPOF 230 236 240 416 Dust off ref photo 318 Dynamic AF area 269 51 points 3D tracking 270 Dynamic area AF 64 65 269 E Easy exposure compensation 276 Electronic analog exposure display 111 Ethernet 229 365 EV steps for exposure cntrl 275 Exif version 2 21 168 416 Exp comp fine tune 275 Exposure 99 100 112 114 lock 112 meters 46 279 mode 102 aperture priority auto 107 manual 109 programmed auto 104 shutter priority auto 106 program 407 Exposure bracketing 116 297 298 Exposure compensation 114 Exposure delay mode 285 F File information 207 File naming 260 File number sequence 283 Filter effects 338 Skylight 338 Warm filter 338 Fine tune optimal exposure 277 Firmware version 328 Flash 171 174 176 178 bracketing 116 297 298 compensation 176 control 170 357 i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR 170 357 standard i TTL flash for digital SLR 170 mode 174 modeling 103 297 monitor pre flash 170 179 range 408 ready indicator 90
47. DPOF Highlight Select set and press _ i Deselect all 2 Select pictures Use the multi selector to scroll through the pictures on the memory card To display the current picture in full screen press amp button To select the current picture for ma Print set DPOF printing press the O n button Ul oes and press A The picture will be marked with a amp icon and the number of prints will be set to 1 Keeping the On button pressed press A or V to specify the number of prints up to 99 to deselect the picture press W when the number of prints is 1 Press when all the desired pictures have been selected 3 Select imprint options is Print set DPOF Wy Select set Highlight the following options and press to toggle the highlighted E ecoxnanaarar option on or off to complete the print PERA order without including this information proceed to Step 4 e Data imprint Print shutter speed and aperture on all pictures in print order e Imprint date Print date of recording on all pictures in print order 4 Complete the print order is Print set DPOF Wy Select set Highlight Done and press amp to complete the print order S Dataimprint C Imprint date M Print Set To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a PictBridge printer select Print DPOF in the PictBridge menu and follow the steps in Printing Multiple Pictur
48. Deleting Items in My Menu To delete the item currently highlighted in My Menu press the tt button A confirmation dialog will be displayed press tt again to remove the selected item from My Menu 346 Reordering Options in My Menu 1 Select Rank items In My Menu highlight Rank items and press gt 2 Select an item E Rank items Image quality Raw A P essi q Highlight the item youwishto I move and press ai aton Select items 3 Position the item B Rank items Image quality JPEG compression Press Aor Wtomove the NEF RAW recording item up or down in My Menu jen FUNC baton and press Repeat Steps 2 3 to reposition additional items 347 348 Displaying Recent Settings To display the twenty most recently used settings select Recent settings for My Menu gt Choose tab 1 Select Choose tab MY MENU Image quality In My Menu highlight ioe Choose tab and press gt fN ppb j T Remove items Rank items s gt L2 2 Select Recent settings Highlight Recent settings and press The name of the menu will change from MY MENU to RECENT SETTINGS Menu items will be added to the top of the recent settings menu as they are used To view My Menu again select My Menu for Recent settings gt Choose tab Technical Notes Camera Care Options and Resources This chapter covers the follo
49. Dust on or near the metal parts of the plug should be removed with a dry cloth Continued use could result in fire Do not handle the power cable or go near the charger during thunderstorms Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock Do not damage modify or forcibly tug or bend the power cable Do not place it under heavy objects or expose it to heat or flame Should the insulation be damaged and the wires become exposed take the power cable to a Nikon authorized service representative for inspection Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or electric shock Do not handle the plug or charger with wet hands Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock Do not use with travel converters or adapters designed to convert from one voltage to another or with DC to AC inverters Failure to observe this precaution could damage the product or cause overheating or fire ZA Use appropriate cables When connecting cables to the input and output jacks use only the cables provided or sold by Nikon for the purpose to maintain compliance with product regulations ZX CD ROMs CD ROMs containing software or manuals should not be played back on audio CD equipment Playing CD ROMs on an audio CD player could cause hearing loss or damage the equipment Z Observe caution when using the flash Using the camera with the flash in close contact with the skin or other obj
50. If maximum aperture is specified using Non CPU lens data pg 196 aperture value will be displayed in viewfinder and control panel Can be used only if lens focal length and maximum aperture are specified using Non CPU lens data pg 196 Use spot or center weighted metering if desired results are not achieved For improved precision specify lens focal length and maximum aperture using Non CPU lens data pg 196 Can be used in manual exposure modes at shutter speeds slower than 1 125 s Exposure determined by presetting lens aperture In aperture priority auto exposure mode preset aperture using lens aperture ring before performing AE lock and shifting lens In manual exposure mode preset aperture using lens aperture ring and determine exposure before shifting lens Exposure compensation required when used with Al 28 85mm f 3 5 4 5 Al 35 105mm f 3 5 4 5 Al 35 135mm f 3 5 4 5 or AF S 80 200mm f 2 8D See teleconverter manual for details Requires PK 12 or PK 13 auto extension ring PB 6D may be required depending on camera orientation Use preset aperture In aperture priority auto exposure mode set aperture using focusing attachment before determining exposure and taking photograph e PF 4 Reprocopy Outfit requires PA 4 Camera Holder 351 352 m Incompatible Accessories and Non CPU Lenses The following accessories and non CPU lenses can NOT be used with the D300 TC 16AS AF teleconverter AF lenses for the F3AF
51. Image authentication information embedded in new photographs as they are taken Off Image authentication information not embedded in new default photographs m Camera Control Pro 2 Image authentication information is not embedded in TIFF RGB photographs recorded directly to a computer using Camera Control Pro 2 available separately Copies Image authentication information is not embedded in copies created using the options in the retouch menu pg 329 323 324 Copyright Information Add copyright information to new photographs as they are taken Copyright information is visible on the fourth shooting data page in the photo information display pg 214 and can be viewed in ViewNxX version 1 2 0 or later or in Capture NX version 1 3 5 or later or Capture NX 2 version 2 1 0 or later available separately pg 368 Done Save changes and return to the setup menu Artist Enter a photographer name as described on page 256 Photographer names can be up to 36 characters long Copyright Enter the name of the copyright holder as described on page 256 Copyright holder names can be up to 54 characters long Attach copyright information Select this IEEE option to attach copyright informationto all subsequent photographs Attach y Sati NIKON TARO copyright information can be turned on a and off by highlighting it and pressing gt p So vV Copyright Information To prevent unauthorized use
52. Options This chapter describes how to play back photographs and details the operations that can be performed during playback Full Frame Playback scssscssssssscssssssssccssscecesssecseees pg 204 Photo Information scsccscsesecscccscsscesscscsssecscsseeeeees pg 206 Viewing Multiple Images Thumbnail Playback pg 218 Taking a Closer Look Playback ZoomM s000 pg 220 Protecting Photographs from Deletion pg 221 Deleting Individual PhotograpN cscscscseees pg 222 203 204 Full Frame Playback To play photographs back press the I button The most recent photograph will be displayed in the monitor Multi selector Sub command dial T button button MENU button O n button amp button Q button button Main command dial Rotate Tall To display tall portrait orientation photographs in tall orientation select On for the Rotate tall option in the playback menu pg 251 Note that because the camera itself is already in the appropriate orientation during shooting images are not rotated automatically during image review pg 205 To Description View Press gt to view photographs in order additional recorded lt to view photographs in photographs reverse order View photo Press A or W
53. Picture Control E Manase Picture Control c Delete l Highlight a custom Picture E C E Control C 1 through C 9 and f N 7 press gt 3 Select Yes py Manage Picture Control g Delete Highlight Yes and press to Ok delete the selected Picture STANDARD 02 Control Nikon Picture Controls The Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera Standard Neutral Vivid and Monochrome can not be renamed or deleted 162 EE Deleting Custom Picture Controls from the Memory Card 1 Copy to card Select Load savel E Manave Picture Control a In the Manage Picture Control Saveledit ree sAN E menu highlight Load save O N ie L Load save P and press E 2 Load save D X vys Y a Select Delete from card E Manase Picture Control e Load save Highlight Delete from card and press CON TRictonae 163 3 Select a Picture Control Highlight a custom Picture Control slot1 through 99 and either e press gt to view current Picture Control settings or press to display confirmation dialog shown at right fy Manage Pict cy Delete from 01 STANDARD 02 102 NEUTRAL 02 EIOS WONOCHROWE 02 OX s o Sharpening Contrast E Brightness W Filter effects Toning Cyanotype 4 GEcrid OR Done iy Manage Picture Control E Delete from card F Delete Picture Control Y WONOCHROWE 02 Yes 4 Select Yes Highlight Yes and press to delete the selected Pic
54. Resume shooting E interval timer shooting O Start Highlight Start gt Restart and press Note that if interval timer photography was paused during shooting any shots remaining in the current interval will be canceled 193 194 EE nterrupting Interval Timer Photography Interval timer shooting will end automatically if the battery is exhausted Interval timer photography can also be ended by e Selecting Start gt Off in the interval timer menu e Performing a two button reset pg 182 e Selecting Reset shooting menu in the shooting menu pg 257 e Changing bracketing settings pg 116 Normal shooting will resume when interval timer photography ends EE No Photograph Photographs will not be taken if the previous photograph has yet to be taken the memory buffer or memory card is full or the camera is unable to focus in single servo AF note that the camera focuses again before each shot Release Mode Regardless of the release mode selected the camera will take the specified number of shots at each interval In Cx continuous high speed mode photographs will be taken at a rate of up to six shots per second In S single frame and C continuous low speed modes photographs will be taken at the rate chosen for Custom Setting d4 CL mode shooting speed pg 282 Using the Monitor Pictures can be played back and shooting and menu settings can be adjusted freely while interval timer photogra
55. SACS Highlight Multiple exposure F aai pe in the shooting menu and f N S sens stn T press P Vo J lt a El Interval timer shooting OFF 2 Select Number of shots EEr a Highlight Number of shots and press gt Y Done E Number of shots 2 gt Auto gain ON Extended Recording Times For an interval between exposures of more than 30 s select On for the Image review pg 251 option in the playback menu and extend the monitor off delay using Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay pg 280 The maximum interval between exposures is 30 s longer than the option selected for Custom Setting c4 3 Select the number of shots Press A or W to choose the number of exposures that will be combined to form a single photograph and press 4 Select Auto gain BB Mutioleexoosure a Y Done a Number of shots Highlight Auto gain and press gt 5 set gain Be Multite exoosure Auto gain Highlight one of the following options and press Option Description Gain adjusted according to number of exposures actually recorded gain for each exposure is set to 2 for 2 exposures 3 for 3 exposures etc oft Gain is not adjusted when recording multiple exposure Recommended if background is dark On default 185 186 6 Select Done E Multiple exposure a Highlight Done and press Y A icon will be displayed in sa Number of shots
56. The size of the copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio Aspect ratio Possible sizes 5 3 3 424 x 2 280 2 560 x 1 704 1 920 x 1 280 1 280 x 856 960 x 640 640 x 424 i 3 424 x 2 568 2 560 x 1 920 1 920 x 1 440 1 280 x 960 960 x 720 640 x 480 maa 3 216 x 2 568 2 400 x 1 920 1 808 x 1 440 1 200 x 960 896 x 720 608 x 480 Monochrome Copy photographs in Black and white Monochrome Sepia or Cyanotype blue and white monochrome Y mM Sepia e Cyanotype Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype Increase displays a preview of the selected saturation image press A to increase color N saturation W to decrease Press fa to create a monochrome copy lt y Decrease saturation 337 Filter Effects Choose from the following color filter effects After adjusting filter effects as described below press to copy the photograph Option Description Creates the effect of a skylight filter making the picture less blue The effect can be previewed in the monitor as shown at right Skylight Creates a copy with warm tone filter effects giving the Warm filter copy a warm red cast The effect can be previewed in the monitor Color Balance Use the multi selector to create a copy with modified color balance as shown below The effect is displayed in the monitor together with red green and blue histograms pg 209 giving the distribution of tones in the copy Press
57. an existing Nikon Picture Control Modify existing Picture Controls pg 150 Modify an existing Picture Control to create a combination of sharpening contrast brightness saturation and hue for a particular scene or effect Create custom Picture Controls pg 154 Store modified Picture Controls under unique names and recall or edit them as desired Share custom Picture Controls pg 158 Custom Picture Controls created with the camera can be saved to the memory card for use in ViewNX version 1 2 0 or later and other compatible software or software created custom Picture Controls can be loaded into the camera Manage custom Picture Controls pg 161 Rename or delete custom Picture Controls Nikon Picture Controls Versus Custom Picture Controls The Picture Controls supplied by Nikon are referred to as Nikon Picture Controls In addition to the Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera optional Picture Controls are available for download from Nikon websites Custom Picture Controls are created through modifications to existing Nikon Picture Controls Both Nikon and custom Picture Controls can be shared among compatible devices and software 147 Selecting Nikon Picture Controls The camera offers four preset Nikon Picture Controls Choose a Picture Control according to the subject or type of scene Option Description Standard processing for balanced results Recommended for most situations Minimal processing for
58. and white the default setting Sepia Cyanotype blue tinted monochrome Red Yellow Green Blue Green Blue Purple Blue Red Purple pg 153 151 152 M Active D Lighting Contrast and Brightness can not be adjusted when Active D Lighting pg 165 is on Any manual adjustments currently in effect will be lost when Active D Lighting is turned on M A Auto Results for auto contrast and saturation vary with exposure and the position of the subject in the frame Use a type Gor D lens for best results The icons for Picture Controls that use auto contrast and saturation are displayed in green in the Picture Control grid and lines appear parallel to the axes of the grid The Picture Control Grid Pressing the 9 button in Step 2 displays a Picture Control grid showing the contrast and saturation for the selected Picture Control in relation to the other Picture Controls only contrast is displayed when Monochrome is selected Release the 8 button to return to the Picture Control menu Previous Settings The line under the value display in the Picture Control setting menu indicates the previous value for the setting Use this as a reference when adjusting settings Filter Effects Monochrome Only The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs The following filter effects are available Option Description Yellow Enhances contrast Can be
59. can be used at any shutter speed Auto FP High Speed Sync Flash syncspeed 1 320 s Auto FP 1 250 s Auto FP 1 250s ee Built in Optional Built in Optional Built in Optional Shutter speed flash flash unit flash flash unit flash flash unit 1 8 000 1 320 S Auto FP Auto FP 1 320 1 250 S Flash sync Auto FP 1 250 30 s Flash sync 1 1 320 s Auto FP and Flash Range When 1 320 s Auto FP is selected for Custom Setting e1 at shutter speeds between 1 250 s and 1 320 s flash range will drop as shutter speed increases Flash range will nevertheless be greater than that obtained at the same speeds with Auto FP M The Flash Ready Indicator When the flash fires at full power the flash indicator in the camera viewfinder will blink to warn that the resulting photograph may be underexposed Note that the flash ready indicators on optional flash units will not display this warning when 1 320 s Auto FP is selected 289 290 e2 Flash Shutter Speed This option determines the slowest shutter speed available when using front or rear curtain sync or red eye reduction in programmed auto or aperture priority auto exposure modes regardless of the setting chosen shutter speeds can be as slow as 30 s in shutter priority auto and manual exposure modes or at flash settings of slow sync slow rear curtain sync or red eye reduction with slow sync Options range from 1
60. cord available separately see pg 369 is pressed halfway for over a second in tripod mode it will activate contrast detect autofocus If the remote cord shutter release button is pressed all the way down without focusing focus will not be adjusted before the picture is taken vV Shooting in Live View Mode Although they will not appear in the final picture banding or distortion may be visible in the monitor under fluorescent mercury vapor or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned horizontally or if an object moves at high speed through the frame Bright light sources may leave after images in the monitor when the camera is panned Bright spots may also appear When shooting in live view mode avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera s internal circuitry Live view shooting ends automatically if the lens is removed Live view mode can be used for up to an hour Note however that when used in live view mode for extended periods the camera may become noticeably warm and the temperature of its internal circuits may rise resulting in image noise and unusual colors To prevent damage to the camera s internal circuits live view shooting will end automatically before the camera overheats A count down display will appear in the monitor 30 s before shooting ends At high ambient temperatures this display may appear immediately when live vie
61. equipped with a ten pin remote terminal for remote control and automatic photography The terminal is provided with a cap which protects the contacts when the terminal is not in use The following accessories can be used all lengths are approximate Remote Cord MC 22 Remote shutter release with blue yellow and black terminals for connection to a remote shutter triggering device allowing control via sound or electronic signals length 1 m 3 ft 3 in Remote Cord MC 30 Remote shutter release can be used to reduce camera shake or keep the shutter open during a time exposure length 80 cm 2 ft 7 in Remote Cord MC 36 Remote shutter release can be used for interval timer photography or to reduce camera shake or keep the shutter open during a time exposure Equipped with back lit control panel shutter release lock for use in bulb photography and timer that beeps at one second intervals length 85 cm 2 ft 9 in Extension Cord MC 21 Can be connected to ML 3 or MC series 20 22 23 25 30 or 36 Only one MC 21 can be used at a time length 3 m 9 ft 10 in Connecting Cord MC 23 Connects two cameras for simultaneous operation length 40 cm 1 ft 4 in 369 370 Remote terminal accessories e Adapter Cord MC 25 Ten pin to two pin adapter cord for connection to devices with two pin terminals including the MW 2 radio control set MT 2 intervalometer and ML 2 modulite control set length 20
62. format for the high definition device The HDMI format can be chosen using the HDMI option in the setup menu pg 314 Menu Guide This chapter describes the options available in the camera menus gt l The Playback Menu Managing Image pg 246 O The Shooting Menu Shooting Option pg 254 Custom Settings Fine Tuning Camera SEULINGS seccceccccsesccocescoseesccaecneeasecnscesezetecrestesee pg 264 Y The Setup Menu Camera Setup ccsscsscssssseeee pg 311 Ki The Retouch Menu Creating Retouched Copies seereis earair aes aeiee pg 329 My Menu Creating a Custom Menu sssessssossossscos pg 344 245 gt The Playback Menu Managing Images The playback menu contains the options listed below For information on using the playback menu see Tutorial Camera Menus Delete 248 Playback folder 249 Hide image 249 Display mode 250 Image review 251 After delete 251 Rotate tall 251 Slide show 252 Print set DPOF 240 246 Selecting Multiple Pictures To select multiple pictures for Delete pg 248 Hide image pg 249 Print set DPOF pg 240 and direct printing pg 236 1 Highlight a picture m Delete ip Selected To view the highlighted picture full screen press and hold the amp button 2 Press the center of the ET multi selector to select the By sence highlighted picture Y
63. gt f e 2 Select Copy to camera GB Manage Picture e Load save Highlight Copy to camera and F press P gt D Copy to card 3 Select a Picture Control Highlight a custom Picture aane Control and either OON iia e press gt to view current i Picture Control settings or Nv GGrid CConfirm press to proceed to Step 4 GB STANDARD 02 Sharpening F Contrast EA Brightness Saturation Hue G Grid Done 158 4 Select a destination Choose a destination for the custom Picture Control C 1 through C 9 and press gt 5 Name the Picture Control Name the Picture Control as described on page 156 The new Picture Control One i f i ENAA will appear in the Picture Control list and thn can be renamed at any time using the ip SUtvivin o2 aS i E02 STANDARD 02 Rename option in the Manage Picture Control menu Manag a Save edit 4 Delete Load save 159 160 BE Saving Custom Picture Controls to the Memory Card 1 Select Copy to card By Manase Picture Control e Load save After displaying the Load save menu as described in esto Step 1 on page 158 highlight i Copy to card and press gt 2 Select a Picture Control Ge Manase Picture Control cr Copy to Highlight a custom Picture F roe Control and press gt f NE 3 Choose a destination Gy Manase Picture Control cy Choose destination Choose a destin
64. indicator Exposure compensation indicator 114 ISO sensitivity indicato 94 Auto ISO sensitivity TNGICATOL iiaiai 96 FV lock indicator esses 179 Clock not set indicator 38 391 Image comment indicator 316 Shooting menu bank s Custom settings bank Exposure and flash bracketing indicator s s s 117 WB bracketing indicator 121 Electronic analog exposure displays i 111 Exposure compensation 114 Exposure and flash bracketing progress Tae e Ce eee 117 WB bracketing progress indicator ee eee 121 PC connection indicator 227 MB D10 battery indicator 365 Multiple exposure Tae e 0 eee 186 GPS connection indicator 201 Interval timer indicator 192 The Viewfinder Display 1 2 000 g oo0oo0o0o OVO ogp000O pouHo VOU OOOO OOO 10 1 Framing grid displayed when On is selected for Custom Setting d2 e 281 2 FOCUS POINTS eeceeeeeee 66 272 3 AF area brackets wwe 43 81 4 Battery indicatov 44 282 display can be turned off with Custom Setting d3 5 FOCUS indicator 51 72 6 Metering sesseecsecsesenseseesseeses 100 7 Autoexposure AE lock 112 8 Shutter speed eee 106 109 9 Aperture f number 107
65. is attached without specifying lens data using Non CPU lens data 5 Auto aperture AA is used regardless of mode selected with flash unit Non TTL auto A selected automatically if non CPU lens is attached without specifying lens data using Non CPU lens data 6 Selected with flash unit 7 Select 1 320 s Auto FP or 1 250 s Auto FP for Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed pg 288 8 CPU lens required 360 Other Flash Units The following flash units can be used in non TTL auto and manual modes If they are set to TTL the camera shutter release button will lock and no photographs can be taken Speedlight SB 80DX SB 30 SB 27 SB 23 5B 292 SB 28DX cp copy 582255822 sgag SB 28 SB 26 SB 20 pate Flash mode SB 25 SB 24 SB 16B SB 15 A Non TTL auto Vv Y M Manual Y Yv Yv Yv ma Repeating flash Y REAR Rear curtain sync Y Vv Vv Vv 1 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter release is disabled Set flash unit to A non TTL auto flash 2 Autofocus is only available with AF Micro lenses 60 mm 105 mm or 200 mm 361 362 M Notes on Optional Speedlights Refer to the Speedlight manual for detailed instructions If the Speedlight supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System refer to the section on CLS compatible digital SLR cameras The D300 is not included in the digital SLR category in the SB 80DX SB 28DX and SB 50DX manuals
66. m or 125 ft its range at an aperture of f 5 6 is 38 5 6 or about 6 8 meters or in feet 125 5 6 approximately 23 ft 7 in For each twofold increase in ISO sensitivity multiply the Guide Number by the square root of two approximately 1 4 359 The following features are available with the SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB R200 and SU 800 Flash unit Advanced Wireless Lighting Commander Remote SB 900 SB 900 SB 900 Flash mode feature SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB 800 SU 800 SB 800 SB 600 SB R200 TTL geen vlvlelvlvlvlvlyvy AA Auto aperture vt LL OE Sl A Non TTL auto v RA we GN Range priority manual M Manual Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv RPT Repeating flash Y l lYv Vv Vv Y Auto FP High Speed Sync Y v vY Y Vivid FV lock Y YV vi vY Vv Y v v AF assist for multi areaAF Y YW ow Vv Flash Color Information Communication REAR Rear curtain sync Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Red eye reduction Vv Vv Vv Vv Auto zoom Vv Y i v Only available when SU 800 is used to control other flash units 2 Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering or when selected with flash unit 3 Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering 4 Selected with flash unit Non TTL auto A selected automatically if non CPU lens
67. menus 1 Display the menus MENU button Press the MENU button to display the menus 2 Highlight the icon for the current menu Press 4 to highlight the icon for the current menu 26 a SHOOTING MENU P35 Shooting menu bank A Reset shooting menu Active folder File naming Image quality Image size JPEG compression El NEF RAW recording 3 Select a menu Press A or W to select the desired menu i PLAYBACK MENU Delete Playback folder Hide image Display mode Image review gt After delete Rotate tall Slide show 4 Position the cursor in the selected menu Playback folder oe y Hide image Press to position the cursor amp taaga rete in the selected menu E Slide show 5 Highlight a menu item PLAYBACK MENU Delete Press A or W to highlight a ES m i K N Display mod menu item T Dela mode After delete Rotate tall El Slide show 6 Display options Press to display options for the selected menu item 7 Highlight an option Press A or to highlight an option 27 28 8 select the highlighted item pe Nikon button a PLAYBACK MENU s Delete Playback folder Hide image Press to select the highlighted item To exit without making a selection press the MENU button 2 Display mode i After delete
68. metering Matrix metering uses information from the 1 005 segment RGB sensor to ensure optimal results for the entire frame 49 50 Ready the Camera When framing photographs in the viewfinder hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle the camera body or lens with your left Keep your elbows propped lightly against your torso for support and place one foot half a pace ahead of the other to keep you upper body stable Hold the camera as shown at right when framing photographs in portrait tall orientation For information on framing photographs in the monitor see page 79 Focus and Shoot 1 Press the shutter release button halfway to focus pg 52 At default settings the camera will focus on the a subject in the center Focus Buffer focus point Frame a indicator capacity photo in the viewfinder with the main subject positioned in the center focus point and press the shutter release button halfway If the camera is able to focus a beep will sound and the in focus indicator will appear in the viewfinder If the subject is dark the AF assist illuminator may light automatically to assist the focus operation Viewfinder display Description Subject in focus Camera unable to focus on subject in focus blinks point using autofocus While the shutter release button is pressed halfway focus will lock an
69. modification 4 Edit the selected Picture Control Sharpening E Contrast See page 1 51 for more F Brightness amp Saturation information To abandon any Hue changes and start over from Seid DE default settings press the f button Press when settings are complete 5 Select a destination Choose a destination for the custom Picture Control C 1 through C 9 and press gt gp Used ESC6 Unused E07 Unused 155 156 6 Name the Picture Control 0123456789 lt Keyboard gt 7 NBCOEFGHIJKL The text entry dialog shown SURESESTUNENE ae at right will be displayed By Gin nemeere default new Picture Cursor input GOK Controls are named by adding a two digit number assigned automatically to the name of the existing Picture Control This name can be edited to create a new name as described below To move the cursor in the name area press the Q amp button and press lt or gt To enter a new letter at the current cursor position use the multi selector to highlight the desired character in the keyboard area and press the center of the multi selector To delete the character at the current cursor position press the i button Custom Picture Control names can be up to 19 characters long Any characters after the 19th will be deleted After entering the name press The Set Picture Control new Picture Control will appear in the Cpe Picture Control list im S
70. new white balance value will remain in preset d 0 until white balance is measured again By copying preset d 0 to one of the other presets before measuring a new value for white balance up to five white balance values can be stored pg 139 EE Copying White Balance from d 0 to Presets d 1 d 4 Follow the steps below to copy a measured value for white balance from d 0 to any of the other presets d 1 d 4 1 Select PRE Preset By White balance Incandescent manual Fluorescent AE Y eee Highlight Preset manual in EE the white balance menu 2 ae pg 126 and press gt 2 Select a destination Highlight the destination preset d 1 to d 4 and press the center of the multi selector 3 Copy d 0 to the selected Se White balance preset E Preset manual Highlight Copy d 0 and s aimem press If comment has T been created for d 0 pg 144 the comment will be copied to the comment for the selected preset 139 140 EE Copying White Balance from a Photograph d 1 d 4 Only Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from a photograph on the memory card to a selected preset d 1 d 4 only Existing white balance values can not be copied to preset d 0 1 Select PRE Preset White balance Incandescent manual Fluorescent W Direct sunlight Highlight Preset manual in f N f tent the white balance menu Sea pg 126 and press gt 2 Select a destination Hig
71. not be activated when the multi selector is pressed f3 Photo Info Playback At the default setting of Info A W Playback lt P pressing Aor Y in full frame playback changes the photo information displayed while pressing lt or gt displays additional images To reverse the role of the multi selector buttons so that pressing A or W displays additional images and pressing lt or gt changes the photo information displayed select Info lt gt PlaybackA V This setting also applies to the multi selector on the optional MB D10 battery pack 301 302 f4 Assign FUNC Button Choose the role played by the Fn button either by itself FUNC button press or when used in combination with the command dials FUNC button dials ry BE FUNC Button Press Selecting FUNC button press for Custom Setting f4 displays the following options Option Description Preview Press the Fn button to preview depth of field pg 103 Press the Fn button to lock flash value built in flash and SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 FVlock flash units only pg 178 Press again to cancel FV lock i AE AF lock Focus and exposure lock while the Fn button is pressed M AE lock only Exposure locks while the Fn button is pressed Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed and He PA remains locked until the button is pressed a second release time the shutter is released
72. of the artist or copyright holder names make sure that Attach copyright information is not selected and that the Artist and Copyright fields are blank before lending or transferring the camera to another person Nikon does not accept liability for any damages or disputes arising from the use of the Copyright information option Save Load Settings Select Save settings to save the following settings to the camera memory card if the memory card is full an error will be displayed pg 394 Menu Option Playback Display mode Image review After delete Rotate tall Shooting all banks Shooting menu bank File naming Image quality Image size JPEG compression NEF RAW recording White balance with fine tuning and presets d 0 d 4 Set Picture Control Color space Active D Lighting Long exp NR High ISO NR ISO sensitivity settings Live view Custom settings all banks All Custom Settings except Reset custom settings 325 326 Menu Option Setup Clean image sensor Video mode HDMI World time excepting date and time Language Image comment Auto image rotation USB Image authentication Copyright information GPS Non CPU lens data My Menu Recent Settings All My Menu items All recent settings Choose tab Settin
73. pg 170 Using the Built in Flash eseossssossoscoscscoscscescsesseseosee pg 171 BlaSW MOG eS iracticcccccsseccscscctsccsessecssecesssssssceseosesssesececassvess pg 174 Flash Compensation ccscscssscssssssssscsssscsececsecscseceres pg 176 ENGL OCK tx cstesraccssscececsssserestscseesesss E pg 178 169 170 The Built in Flash The built in flash has a Guide Number GN 17 56 m ft ISO 200 20 C 68 F It supports i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR which uses monitor pre flashes to adjust flash output for balanced lighting not only when natural lighting is inadequate but when filling in shadows and backlit subjects or adding a catch light to the subject s eyes The following types of i TTL flash control are supported i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR Speedlight emits series of nearly invisible preflashes monitor preflashes immediately before main flash Preflashes reflected from objects in all areas of frame are picked up by 1 005 segment RGB sensor and are analyzed in combination with range information from matrix metering system to adjust flash output for natural balance between main subject and ambient background lighting If type G or D lens is used distance information is included when calculating flash output Precision of calculation can be increased for non CPU lenses by providing lens data focal length and maximum aperture see pg 196 Not available when spot metering is used Sta
74. right corner of the display Use the multi selector to scroll to areas of the frame not visible in the monitor Press to exit Zoom m Take the picture Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to take the picture If continuous high speed or continuous low speed is selected for Release mode the monitor will turn off while the shutter release button is pressed 85 g 86 m Focusing with Contrast Detect Autofocus Contrast detect autofocus will take longer than normal phase detection autofocus In the following situations the camera may be unable to focus using contrast detect autofocus The camera is not mounted on a tripod e The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame e The subject lacks contrast e The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness or the subject is lit by spot lighting or by a neon sign or other light source that changes in brightness e Across star filter or other special filter is used e The subject appears smaller than the focus point e The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns e g windows in a skyscraper e The subject is moving Note that the focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is unable to focus Use an AF S lens The desired results may not be achieved with other lenses or teleconverters Remote Cords If the shutter release button on a remote
75. selector 301 c Timers AE lock f3 Photo info playback 301 cl Shutter release button AE L 279 f4 Assign FUNC button 302 a Auto meter off delay 279 f Assign preview button 305 G Self timer delay 280 f Assign AE L AF L button 306 c4 Monitor off delay 280 f7 Customize command dials 307 d Shooting display f8 Release button to use dial 308 d1 Beep 281 9 No memory card 309 d2 Viewfinder grid display 281 10 Reverse indicators 310 d3 Viewfinder warning display 282 265 266 C Custom Setting Bank Custom Settings are stored in one of four banks Changes to settings in one bank have no effect on the others To store a particular combination of frequently used settings select one of the four banks and set the camera to these settings The new settings will be stored in the bank even when the camera is turned off and will be restored the next time the bank is selected Different combinations of settings can be stored in the other banks allowing the user to switch instantly from one combination to another by selecting the appropriate bank from the bank menu The default names for the four Custom Settings banks are A B C and D A descriptive caption can be added using the Rename option as described on page 256 Custom Settings Bank The bank letter appears in the control panel and shooting information displays If settings in the current bank have been modified from default values an asterisk w
76. that the GPS device is searching for a signal pictures taken while the icon is flashing will not include GPS data 201 202 BE Setup Menu Options The GPS item in the setup menu contains the options listed below e Auto meter off Choose whether or not the exposure meters will turn off automatically when a GPS unit is attached Option Description Exposure meters will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for the period specified in Custom Setting c2 Enable Auto meter off delay This reduces the drain on the default battery but may prevent GPS data from being recorded if the shutter release button is pressed all the way down without pausing g Exposure meters will not turn off while a GPS unit is Disable connected GPS data will always be recorded e Position This item is only available if a GPS device is connected when it displays the current latitude longitude altitude Coordinated Universal Time UTC and heading if supported as reported by the GPS device Heading The heading is only recorded if the GPS device is equipped with a digital compass note that the GP 1 is not equipped with a compass Keep the GPS device pointing in the same direction as the lens and at least 20cm 8 in from the camera Coordinated Universal Time UTC UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the camera clock More About Playback Playback
77. the center of the multi selector E White balance rA A d o d i ER RA d3 d 2 PRE Select Set 3 Select Set Highlight Set and press gt Fine tuning menu for the selected white balance preset is displayed pg 130 E White balance E Preset manual Edit comment Select image Copy 0 Selecting a White Balance Preset the WB Button At a setting of PRE Preset manual presets can also be selected by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub command dial The current preset is displayed in the control panel while the WB button is pressed Q DN IN SN cess WB button Sub command dial Control panel 143 EH Entering a Comment Follow the steps below to enter a descriptive comment of up to thirty six characters for a selected white balance preset 1 Select PRE Preset a White balance O Incandescent manual Fluorescent W Direct sunlight Highlight Preset manual in the white balance menu J EA Choose color teno pg 126 and press P NE 2 Selecta preset fay White balance a Highlight the desired preset Ea Fra uns Y and press the center of the LANT PA RA multi selector N 3 Select Edit comment iy White balance E Preset manual Highlight Edit comment and press gt Select image Copy 0 4 Edit the comment E White balance a 1 Sh8 Edit the comment as described on page PARESE AT
78. the original copies created from NEF RAW photos are saved as large fine quality JPEG images and copies created from TIFF RGB photos are saved as fine quality JPEG images of the same size as the original Size priority compression is used when copies are saved in JPEG format 333 D Lighting D lighting brightens shadows making it ideal for dark or backlit photographs Before Press A or W to choose the amount of Dlishting correction performed The effect can be ie am previewed in the edit display Press to R A t A l copy the photograph 334 Red Eye Correction This option is used to correct red eye caused by the flash and is available only with photographs taken using the flash The photograph selected for red eye correction is previewed as shown at right Confirm the effects of red eye correction and create a copy as described in the following table Note that red eye correction may not always produce the expected results and may in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the image that are not affected by red eye check the preview thoroughly before proceeding arel zoom Save To Use Description Press Q ge to cor rec 7 R zoom in Sl utton Zoomin i Q to zoom out While photo is zoomed in use multi selector to view areas of image Zoom out QE not visible in monitor Keep multi selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas of frame N Navigation window is disp
79. to view information information about current photograph pg 206 View qE See page 218 for more information on thumbnails the thumbnail display Zoom in on Q See page 220 for more information on photograph playback zoom 2 Confirmation dialog will be displayed Delete images T Press f again to delete photo Change To protect image or to remove protect On protection from protected image press status O n button pg 221 peels Io Monitor will turn off Photographs 9 can be taken immediately mode Display menus MENU See page 245 for more information Image Review When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu pg 251 photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor for about 20 s the default setting after shooting because the camera is already in the correct orientation images are not rotated automatically during image review In single frame self timer and mirror up release modes photographs are displayed one at a time as they are taken In continuous CE release mode display begins when shooting ends with the first photograph in the current series displayed See Also For information on choosing how long the monitor will remain on when no operations are performed see Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay pg 280 The roles of the multi selector buttons can be reversed so that the A and YV buttons display other images and the lt and gt buttons control photo informat
80. used only when the first default batteries in the MB D10 are exhausted D300 Use camera battery The batteries in the MB D10 are used only first when the camera battery is exhausted A icon is displayed in the camera control panel when the batteries in the MB D10 are in use P i5 FABA ac mle gm SHT The MB D10 Battery Pack The MB D10 takes one EN EL3e EN EL4a or EN EL4 rechargeable Li ion battery or eight AA alkaline Ni MH lithium or nickel manganese batteries an EN EL3e is supplied with the camera EN EL4a EN EL4 and AA batteries are available separately Higher frame rates are available with EN EL4a EN EL4 and AA batteries pg 77 note however that in the case of AA batteries the frame rate will decrease as battery level drops The shooting information display shows the type of battery inserted in the MB D10 as follows MB D10 battery type display Battery type EED ZZA EN EL3e rechargeable Li ion battery Ea E777 EN EL4a or EN EL4 rechargeable Li ion battery AA batteries 287 e Bracketing Flash e1 Flash Sync Speed This option controls flash sync speed Option Description Use auto FP high speed sync with SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SB R200 flash units If other flash units are 1 320s used shutter speed is set to 1 320 s When the camera Auto FP shows a shutter speed of 1 320 s in exposure mode F or A auto FP high speed sync will b
81. using a cloth lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly In rare instances static electricity may cause the LCD displays to light up or go dark This does not indicate a malfunction and the display will soon return to normal The lens and mirror are easily damaged Dust and lint should be gently removed with a blower When using an aerosol blower keep the can vertical to prevent discharge of liquid To remove fingerprints and other stains from the lens apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and wipe the lens carefully See The Low Pass Filter pp 373 376 for information on cleaning the low pass filter Lens contacts Keep the lens contacts clean Do not touch the shutter curtain The shutter curtain is extremely thin and easily damaged Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on the curtain poke it with cleaning tools or subject it to powerful air currents from a blower These actions could scratch deform or tear the curtain Storage To prevent mold or mildew store the camera in a dry well ventilated area If the product will not be used for an extended period remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic bag containing a desiccant Do not however store the camera case in a plastic bag as this may cause the material to deteriorate Note that desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be replaced at
82. wrap around pg 272 For information on choosing the number of focus points that can be selected using the multi selector see Custom Setting a8 AF point selection pg 272 For information on changing the role of the multi selector center button see Custom Setting f1 Multi selector center button pg 300 67 68 Focus Lock Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing making it possible to focus on a subject that will not be in a focus point in the final composition It can also be used when the autofocus system is unable to focus pg 70 1 Focus Position the subject in the selected focus J D point and press the shutter release button halfway to initiate focus 2 Check that the in focus indicator appears in the viewfinder 7 Single servo AF D Focus will lock automatically E D when the in focus indicator appears and remain locked until you remove your finger de mN from the shutter release button Focus can also be locked by pressing the AE L AF L button see following page Continuous servo AF Press the AE L AF L button to lock both H focus and exposure an AE Licon appears D in the viewfinder see page 112 Focus D and exposure will remain locked while mK the AE L AF L button is pressed even if Shuttergelease you later remove your finger from the button shutter release button
83. 00 and ISO 3200 in steps equivalent to 1 3 EV Settings of from about 0 3 1 EV below ISO 200 and 0 3 1 EV above ISO 3200 are also available for special situations ISO sensitivity can be adjusted by pressing the ISO button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is sol displayed in the control panel or viewfinder IS0 button Main command dial Control panel Viewfinder ISO sensitivity 3200 The ISO Sensitivity Menu ISO sensitivity can also be adjusted using the ISO sensitivity option in the shooting menu pg 254 94 ISO Sensitivity Settings The settings available depend on the option selected for Custom Setting b1 ISO sensitivity step value pg 275 Custom Setting b1 ISO sensitivity step value ISO sensitivity settings available LO 1 LO 0 7 LO 0 3 200 250 320 400 500 shied 640 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3200 HI 0 3 HI 0 7 HI 1 LO 1 LO 0 5 200 280 400 560 800 1100 1 2 step 1600 2200 3200 HI 0 5 HI 1 1 step LO 1 200 400 800 1600 3200 HI 1 If possible the current ISO sensitivity setting is maintained when the step value is changed If the current ISO sensitivity setting is not available at the new step value ISO sensitivity will be rounded up to the nearest available setting HI 0 3 HI 1 The settings HI 0 3 through HI 1 correspond to ISO sensitivities 0 3 1 EV over ISO 3200 ISO 4000 6400 equivalent
84. 1 spot 100 278 Microdrive 39 371 Mired 131 Mirror 79 91 376 lock up for cleaning 376 Modeling flash 297 Monitor 12 53 79 204 312 cover 19 Monitor off delay 280 Monochrome 337 Black and white 337 Cyanotype 337 Sepia 337 Mounting index 35 MTP PTP 225 318 Multi selector 301 Multi selector center button 300 Multiple exposure 184 Multiple exposure 184 My Menu 344 Add items 344 Rank items 347 Remove items 346 N NEF 56 58 NEF RAW 56 59 NEF RAW recording 58 NEF RAW bit depth 59 12 bit 59 14 bit 59 Type 58 Compressed 58 Lossless compressed 58 Uncompressed 58 Nikon Transfer 224 225 No memory card 309 Non CPU lens data 196 0 Optional flash 291 Overview data 216 P PC 227 Photo info 206 250 Photo info playback 301 PictBridge 231 416 Picture angle 356 Picture Controls 146 Playback 53 203 folder 249 full frame 204 information 206 250 menu 246 slide show 252 thumbnail 218 zoom 220 Playback folder 249 Predictive 63 Print DPOF 236 Border 238 Page size 238 Start printing 238 Time stamp 238 Print options PictBridge Setup menu 234 Border 234 Cropping 235 No of copies 234 Page size 234 Start printing 235 Time stamp 234 Print select 236 Border 238 Page size 238 Start printing 238 Time stamp 238 Print set DPOF 230 Print
85. 1 320 s Auto FP Lowering the Built in Flash To save power when the flash is not in use press it gently downward until the latch clicks into place M The Built in Flash Use with lenses with focal lengths of 18 300 mm pg 354 Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows The flash has a minimum range of 60 cm 2 ft and can not be used in the macro range of macro zoom lenses If the flash fires in continuous release mode pg 76 only one picture will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the flash after it has been used for several consecutive shots The flash can be used again after a short pause See Also See page 178 for information on locking flash value FV for a metered subject before recomposing a photograph For information on choosing a flash sync speed see Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed pg 288 For information on choosing the slowest shutter speed available when using the flash see Custom Setting e2 Flash shutter speed pg 290 For information on using the built in flash in commander mode see Custom Setting e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash pg 291 See page 357 for information on using optional flash units For information on the range of the built in flash see page 408 173 Flash Modes The D300 supports the following flash modes Flash mode Description Front curtain sync Thi
86. 116 297 298 Auto bracketing Mode M 298 Auto bracketing set 297 AE amp flash 117 297 AE only 117 297 Flash only 117 297 WB bracketing 121 297 Auto FP high speed sync 288 289 357 Auto image rotation 317 Auto meter off 46 279 Auto meter off delay 279 Auto area AF 64 65 Autofocus 62 64 66 70 B Backlight 46 285 Battery 30 32 44 285 287 321 charging 30 pack 285 287 322 365 Battery info 321 Battery order 287 Beep 281 Body cap 5 34 368 419 Menu items and options in the camera monitor are shown in brackets Bracketing 116 297 298 exposure 116 297 298 flash 116 297 298 white balance 116 121 Bracketing order 299 Built in AF assist illuminator 273 Bulb 110 Burst 186 282 303 c C 62 69 267 269 Camera Control Pro 2 224 225 368 Capture NX 56 318 368 Center weighted 100 277 278 Center weighted area 277 CL mode shooting speed 282 Clean image sensor 373 Clock 37 315 battery 38 CLS 357 Color balance 338 Color space 167 Adobe RGB 167 sRGB 167 Color space 167 Color temperature 127 128 133 CompactFlash 39 312 371 Computer 224 Control panel 8 Copyright 214 324 Copyright information 324 CPU contacts 352 CPU lens 35 352 Creative Lighting System 357 Custom setting bank 266 Custom Settings 264 Customize command dials 307 D Date and time 37 315 Daylight saving time 37 315
87. 6 1 8 11 16 f 22 32 1 4 f 16 Aperture ILS bo wD 6 o 30 15 8 4 2 1 2 4 8 15 30 60 125 250 5001000 2000 4000 8000 Shutter speed The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with ISO sensitivity the above graph assumes an ISO sensitivity of ISO 200 equivalent When matrix metering is used values over 17 1 3 EV are reduced to 17 1 3 EV 407 Aperture Sensitivity and Flash Range The range of the built in flash varies with sensitivity ISO equivalency and aperture Aperture at ISO equivalent of Range 200 400 800 1600 3200 m ft 1 4 2 2 8 4 5 6 1 0 12 0 3ft 3in 39ft 4in 2 2 8 4 5 6 8 0 7 8 5 2ft 4in 27ft 11in 2 8 4 5 6 8 11 0 6 6 1 2ft 20ft 4 5 6 8 11 16 0 6 4 2 2ft 13ft 9in 5 6 8 11 16 22 0 6 3 0 2ft 9ft 10in 8 11 16 22 32 0 6 2 1 2ft 6ft 11in 11 16 22 32 0 6 1 5 2ft 4ft 11in 16 22 32 0 6 1 1 2ft 3ft 7in 22 32 0 6 0 8 2ft 2ft 7in The built in flash has a minimum range of 0 6 m 2 ft In programmed auto exposure mode mode F the maximum aperture minimum f number is limited according to ISO sensitivity as shown below Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of 200 400 800 1600 3200 3 5 4 5 5 6 7 1 For each one step increase in sensitivity e g fro
88. 6 Ni MH AA batteries BFR6 FR6 AA lithium Select when using FR6 lithium AA batteries BZR6 ZR6 AA Ni Mn Select when using ZR6 Ni Mn AA batteries 285 286 Using AA Batteries EN EL4a or EN EL4 rechargeable Li ion batteries available separately or EN EL3e rechargeable Li ion batteries are recommended for best performance Fewer pictures can be taken with AA batteries pg 417 The capacity of AA batteries drops sharply at temperatures below 20 C 68 F and varies with make and storage conditions in some cases batteries may cease to function before their expiry date Some AA batteries can not be used due to their performance characteristics and limited capacity alkaline and nickel manganese batteries should only be used if no alternative is available and then only at warmer temperatures The camera shows the level of AA batteries as follows Control panel Viewfinder Description razza Batteries fully charged r7 co Low battery Ready fresh batteries z cA blinks blinks Shutter release disabled Change batteries Battery level for EN EL3e EN EL4a or EN EL4 rechargeable Li ion batteries is displayed normally d11 Battery Order Choose whether the battery in the camera or the batteries in the battery pack are used first when an optional MB D10 battery pack is attached Option Description BDN Use MB D10 batteries The camera battery is
89. 8 ND8S ND400 A2 A12 B2 B8 B12 Optional flash units Nikon Speedlights SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SB 400 Nikon Wireless Remote Speedlight SB R200 Wireless Speedlight Commander SU 800 See page 358 for more information Water guards Water Guard WG AS2 The optional WG AS2 is a water guard that covers the base of SB 900 flash units mounted on the D300 increasing the SB 900 s splash resistance by protecting the accessory shoe contacts from rain and spray PC card adapters EC AD1 PC Card Adapter The EC AD1 PC card adapter allows Type CompactFlash memory cards to be inserted in PCMCIA card slots 367 368 Software Capture NX A complete photo editing package Capture NX 2 A complete photo editing package with such advanced editing features as selection control points and an auto retouch brush Camera Control Pro 2 Control the camera remotely from a computer and save photographs directly to the computer hard disk Image Authentication Determine whether photographs taken with image authentication pg 323 on have been modified after shooting Note Use the latest versions of Nikon software Most Nikon software offers an auto update feature when the computer is connected to the Internet Body cap Body Cap The body cap keeps the mirror viewfinder screen and low pass filter free of dust when a lens is not in place Remote terminal accessories The D300 is
90. A blue B axis pg 130 to fine tune white balance when Ef or PRE is selected use the shooting menu as described on page 129 Six settings in both directions are available each increment is equivalent to about 5 mired pg 131 Press the WB button and rotate the sub command dial until the desired value is displayed in the control panel Rotating the sub command dial to the left increases the amount of amber A Rotating the sub command dial to the right increases the amount of blue B At settings other than 0 a 4 icon appears in the control panel Control panel WB butto Sub command dial Choosing a Color Temperature When I Choose color temp is selected for white balance color temperature can be selected by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub command dial The color temperature is displayed in the control panel f Z 7 eX WB button Sub command dial Control panel 1 Choose Color Temperature Note that the desired results will not be obtained with flash or fluorescent lighting Choose Flash or Fluorescent for these sources With other light sources take a test shot to determine if the selected value is appropriate The White Balance Menu Color temperature can also be selected in the white balance menu Note that the color temperature with the WB button and the sub command dial replaces the value selected in the white balance menu
91. AT 256 ii UNOPORSTUVWXYZI Eh urso input CHOK 144 Image Enhancement This chapter describes how to optimize sharpening contrast brightness saturation and hue using Picture Controls how to preserve detail in highlights and shadows using active D Lighting and how to choose a color space PICCUPE GOMTIOIS rr caccsccocecescesscecsesotaescetesssscstetcesecescesesee pg 146 Creating Custom Picture Controls sssccssssscsssecsssecenseeees pg 154 Active D Lighting eeaeee arere eterea e Arenai ce pg 165 GOLOMSP aCe vex eA eara ASEA E REAIS EEEE SAA pg 167 145 Picture Controls Nikon s unique Picture Control system makes it possible to share image processing settings among compatible devices and software Select from the Picture Controls provided with the camera to instantly adjust image processing settings or make independent adjustments to sharpening contrast brightness saturation and hue These settings can be saved under new names as custom Picture Controls to be recalled or edited at will Custom Picture Controls can also be saved to the memory card for use in compatible software and software created Picture Controls can be loaded into the camera Any given set of Picture Controls will produce nearly the same results on all cameras that support the Nikon Picture Control system 146 EH Using Picture Controls Picture Controls can be used as described below Select Nikon Picture Controls pg 148 Select
92. Can I control how the camera focuses Autofocus 61 How do take a lot of photographs Release mode 74 quickly Can I change the frame advance rate Shooting speed 76 282 Can I shoot a self portrait Self timer mode 89 Can I take pictures under low light nies without the flash ISO sensitivity 24 Can the ISO sensitivity choose be ISO sensitivity auto 96 adjusted to ensure optimal exposure control How do freeze or blur moving objects EXROSUIS mode 5 106 shutter priority auto How do I blur background details or keep Exboc re imode f both foreground and background in P 107 focus aperture priority auto Question Key phrase See page Can set both shutter speed and aperture Exposure mode M 109 manually manual Can make photos brighter or darker Exposure compensation 114 How do I make a time exposure Long time exposures 111 Can vary exposure or flash level Exposure and flash A 5 117 297 automatically over a series of photos bracketing Can I create multiple copies ofa photo White balance 121 297 using different white balance settings _ bracketing How do I adjust white balance White balance 125 Can take pictures with a flash Flash photography 171 How can reduce red eye Heh mode red eye 174 reduction How can I record multiple shots as a Multiple exposure 184 single photograph Can pick the standard exposure level Fine tuneiopti
93. Delete option in the playback menu pg 248 The After delete option in the playback menu determines whether the next image or the previous image is displayed after an image is deleted pg 251 222 Connections Connecting to External Devices This chapter describes how to copy photographs to a computer how to print pictures and how to view them on a television set Connecting to a COMPUTED sessesesossssssosososesescosososeseseo pg 224 Direct USB CONNECTION nieee a naea A E ARE AEn A AES pg 226 Wireless and Ethernet NeEtworks ccssssccssseccssccsssecsneecsneccsnees pg 229 Printing Photographs essssessossoscsscscsscscseossosossoscososeos pg 230 DireGhUSBIGONNECON aaa aA E A RE REA pg 231 Viewing Photographs on TV ssssssssscsscscsesssosossosoososeos pg 242 Standard Definition DeVices sesssssscssecssseccssecsseecsnecesseeesses pg 242 High Definition Devices ss ssssssssssssseessssssecessssseeosssssteosssssteessss pg 244 223 224 Connecting to a Computer This section describes how to connect the camera to a computer using the supplied UC E4 USB cable Once the camera is connected Nikon Transfer or optional Nikon software such as Camera Control Pro 2 can be used to copy photographs to the computer or control the camera remotely m Connecting Cables Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface cables Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at
94. Displayed only if Focus point is selected for Display mode pg 250 207 E 208 BE Highlights 6 1 Protect status uo esses 2 Retouch indicator 3 Image highlights 2 5 Current channel 6 Highlight display indicator 250 1 Displayed only if Highlights is selected for Display mode pg 250 2 Blinking areas indicate highlights areas that may s be overexposed for current channel Press lt or gt while pressing amp amp 2 button to cycle through channels as follows RGB R G B all channels red green blue BE RGB Histogram ES Select R G B culos bedscavaseeveossuniaes 221 5 Histogram RGB channel 3 In all 1 Protect status 2 Retouch indicator 329 histograms horizontal axis gives 3 Image highlights 2 250 pixel brightness vertical axis 4 Folder number number of pixels frame number ou eesseeeeessssssseeeee 258 6 Current channel 7 Histogram red channel 3 8 Histogram green channel 9 Histogram blue channel 3 1 Displayed only if RGB histogram is selected for Display mode pg 220 2 Blinking areas indicate highlights areas that may Ans be overexposed for current channel Press lt or gt while pressing 9 button to cycle through channels as follows RGB R e G B B all channels red green blue Highlight display off 209 3 Some sample histograms are shown below e If the ima
95. ED AF S VR 70 200mm f 2 8G ED AF S 300mm f 4D ED AF S 80 200mm f 2 8D ED AF S 400mm f 2 8D ED II AF S VR 200 400mm f 4G ED 2 AF S 400mm f 2 8D ED AF S NIKKOR 400mm f 2 8G ED VR AF 400mm f 2 8D ED AF S NIKKOR 500mm f 4G ED VR AF S 500mm f 4D ED II AF S NIKKOR 600mm f 4G ED VR 1 Autofocus not supported 2 Autofocus not supported when used with AF S Teleconverter TC 17E II TC 20E Il Compatible Non CPU Lenses If lens data are specified using Non CPU lens data pg 196 many of the features available with CPU lenses can also be used with non CPU lenses If lens data are not specified color matrix metering can not be used and center weighted metering is used when matrix metering is selected Non CPU lenses can only be used in exposure modes A and M when aperture must be set using the lens aperture ring If the maximum aperture has not been specified using Non CPU lens data the camera aperture display will show the number of stops from maximum aperture the actual aperture value must be read off the lens aperture ring Aperture priority auto will be selected automatically in exposure modes P and amp The exposure mode indicator F or 5 in the control panel will blink and A will be displayed in the viewfinder 353 354 The Built in Flash The built in flash can be used with CPU lenses with focal lengths of 18 300mm Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows The flash has a minimum range of 60 cm 2 ft
96. L Buttons Depending on the options selected for Custom Settings f5 Assign preview button pg 305 and f6 Assign AE L AF L button pg 306 the depth of field preview and AE L AF L buttons can be used with the command dials to perform the same functions as the Fn button 17 18 BE White Balance Press the WB button and rotate the command dials Choose a white J A E balance setting EER N pg 127 ED Z a amp TS N WB button Main command dial Control panel Fine tune TT white balance 4 Gee eo pg 132 set 2 ARS color M wey gt temperature cs IOIO pg 133 or Pg 193 WB button Sub command dial Control panel choose a white balance preset pg 143 EE Flash Settings Press the 4 button and rotate the command dials Choose flash mode pg 171 A 4 button Main command di Adjust flash compensation pg 176 EN i MEN Sub command dial Control panel Attaching the AN D300 Camera Strap Attach the camera strap securely to the two eyelets on the camera body as shown below The BM 8 Monitor Cover A clear plastic cover is provided with the camera to keep the monitor clean and protect it when the camera is not in use To attach the cover insert the projection on the top of the cover into the matching indentation above the camera monitor and press th
97. L balanced fill flash for digital SLR Focal Length Not Listed If the correct focal length is not listed choose the closest value greater than the actual focal length of the lens Zoom Lenses Lens data are not adjusted when non CPU lenses are zoomed in or out After changing the zoom position select new values for lens focal length and maximum aperture HE The Non CPU Lens Data Menu 1 Select Non CPU lens data SETUP MENU Highlight Non CPU lens data P Coovistifernaten ON in the setup menu pg 311 f Tia z 2 nens aata R and press P Vege Firmware version 2 Select a lens number E Nor CPU lens data Highlight Lens number and oe Di press lt 4 or gt to choosealens gt A Eie number between 1 and 9 apg Voiman sertare N Move 3 Selecta focal length Nor lt PU lens data Highlight Focal length mm ea Dias and press or gt to choosea N EE focal length between 6 and am oartire 4 000 mm QA Move 4 select a maximum Non CPU lens data aperture AN Done Highlight Maximum aperture Caen and press 4 or gt to choosea pAg a maximum aperture between an en f 1 2 and f 22 The maximum aperture for teleconverters is the combined maximum aperture of the teleconverter and lens 197 5 Select Done E Non CPU lens data Highlight Done and press The specified focal length and Meco ion EA aperture will be stored under a the chosen lens numb
98. Manual this guide e Quick Guide e Software Installation Guide e Software Suite CD ROM e Registration card U S A only http www mynikon com pl Symbols and Conventions To make it easier to find the information you need the following symbols and conventions are used IV This icon marks cautions information that should be read before use to prevent damage to the camera This icon marks notes information that should be read before 4 using the camera Menu items options and messages displayed in the camera monitor are shown in brackets Trademark Information Macintosh Mac OS and QuickTime are registered trademarks of Apple Inc Microsoft Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation Microdrive is a trademark of Hitachi Global Storage Technologies in the United States and other countries HDMI the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC PictBridge is a trademark All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders D300 Introduction Tutorial KE Image Recording Options Focus Release Mode ISO Sensitivity Exposure M White Balance Image Enhancement Flas
99. Ne ENC Monochrome ie es01 VIVID 02 OH C Grid GAdiust Custom Picture Controls canbe renamed ERENT at any time using the Rename optionin ss the Manage Picture Control menu sweet pax Delete Load save Custom Picture Controls Custom Picture Controls are not affected by Reset shooting menu pg 257 Custom Picture Controls do not have a Quick adjust option pg 151 Custom Picture Controls based on Monochrome have Filter effects and Toning options in place of Saturation and Hue controls The Original Picture Control Icon The Nikon Picture Control on which the custom Original Picture Picture Control is based is indicated by an icon Control icon in the top right corner of the edit display Contrast Brightness Saturation Hue GEGrid GOK HReset 157 Sharing Custom Picture Controls Custom Picture Controls created using the Picture Control Utility available with ViewNxX version 1 2 0 or later or optional software such as Capture NX version 1 3 5 or later or Capture NX 2 version 2 1 0 or later can be copied to a memory card and loaded into the camera or custom Picture Controls created with the camera can be copied to the memory card to be used in compatible cameras and software BE Copying Custom Picture Controls to the Camera 1 Select Load save iy Manage Picture Control Le In the Manage Picture Control Saveledit J KR Y R menu highlight Load save eae and press
100. Nikon DIGITAL CAMERA D300 User s Manual Where to Find It Find what you re looking for from K The Q amp A Index pp iv ix Know what you want to do but don t know the function name Find it from the question and answer index The Table of Contents pp x xvii Find items by function or menu name The Quick Start Guide pp 21 22 A brief guide for those who want to get started taking pictures right away The Index pp 419 425 Search by key word Error Messages pp 391 398 If a warning is displayed in the viewfinder or monitor find the solution here Troubleshooting pp 383 390 Camera behaving unexpectedly Find the solution here A For Your Safety Before using the camera for the first time read the safety instructions in For Your Safety pg xviii Digitutor Digitutor a series of watch and learn manuals in movie form is available from the following website http www nikondigitutor com index_eng html Package Contents Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera Memory cards are sold separately e D300 digital camera pg 3 e Body cap pp 34 368 e BM 8 LCD monitor cover pg 19 e DK 5 eyepiece cap pg 20 e EN EL3e rechargeable Li ion battery with terminal cover pp 30 32 e MH 18a quick charger with power cable pg 30 e UC E4 USB cable pp 224 232 e EG D100 video cable pg 242 e AN D300 strap pg 19 e Warranty e User s
101. Option Description AUTO Auto default The camera automatically selects the appropriate format 480p 480p progressive 640 x 480 progressive format 576p 576p progressive 720 x 576 progressive format 720p 720p progressive 1 280 x 720 progressive format 1080i 1080i interlaced 1 920 x 1 080 interlaced format The camera monitor turns off automatically when an HDMI device is connected World Time Change time zones set the camera clock choose the date display order and turn daylight saving time on or off Option Description Choose a time zone The camera clock is automatically set to the time in the new time zone Date and time Set the camera clock pg 37 Choose the order in which the day month and year are displayed Turn daylight saving time on or off The camera clock will automatically be advanced or set back one hour The default setting is Off Time zone Date format Daylight saving time Language Choose a language for camera menus and messages The following options are available De Deutsch German Pt Portugu s Portuguese En English English Ru Pycckui Russian Es Espanol Spanish Sv Svenska Swedish Fi Suomi Finnish 3 chyz 888 _ Traditional Chinese Fr Fran ais French fi hxk Simplified Chinese It Italiano Italian A AA Japanese NI Nederlands Dutch st sla Korean PI Polski Polish
102. Pictures taken at these settings are more likely to be subject to noise and color distortion LO 0 3 LO 1 The settings LO 0 3 through LO 1 correspond to ISO sensitivities 0 3 1 EV below ISO 200 ISO 160 100 equivalent Use for larger apertures when lighting is bright Contrast is slightly lower than normal in most cases ISO sensitivities of ISO 200 or above are recommended See Also For information on Custom Setting b1 ISO sensitivity step value see page 275 For information using the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise at high ISO sensitivities see page 263 95 96 Auto ISO Sensitivity Control If Off the default setting is chosen for the ISO sensitivity auto control option in the shooting menu ISO sensitivity will remain fixed at the value selected by the user see page 94 If On is chosen ISO sensitivity will automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be achieved at the value selected by the user flash level is adjusted appropriately The maximum value for auto ISO sensitivity can be selected using the Maximum sensitivity option in the ISO sensitivity auto control menu the minimum value for auto ISO sensitivity is automatically set to ISO 200 note that if the value selected for Maximum sensitivity is lower than the value currently selected for ISO sensitivity the value selected for Maximum sensitivity will be used In exposure modes P and A sensitivity
103. R 200mm f 2G ED AF S VR 200 400mm f 4G ED At ranges under 0 7m 2ft 4in the following lenses may block the AF assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor AF Micro 200mm f 4D ED AF S DX 17 55mm f 2 8G ED AF S VR 24 120mm f 3 5 5 6G ED AF S NIKKOR 24 70mm f 2 8G ED AF Micro 70 180mm f 4 5 5 6D ED AF S 28 70mm f 2 8D ED AF S 17 35mm f 2 8D ED At ranges under 1 1m 3ft 7in the following lenses may block the AF assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor AF S DX VR 55 200mm f 4 5 6G ED At ranges under 1 5m 4ft 11in the following lenses may block the AF assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor AF S VR 70 200mm f 2 8G ED AF S VR 70 300mm f 4 5 5 6G ED AF S 80 200mm f 2 8D AF S NIKKOR 14 24mm f 2 8G ED AF 80 200mm f 2 8D ED At ranges under 2 3m 7ft 7in the following lenses may block the AF assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor AF VR 80 400mm f 4 5 5 6D ED 355 356 Calculating Picture Angle The size of the area exposed by a 35mm camera is 36 x 24 mm The size of the area exposed by the D300 in contrast is approximately 23 6 x 15 8 mm meaning that the diagonal picture angle of a 35mm camera is approximately 1 5 times that of the D300 To calculate the focal length of lenses for the D300 in 35mm format multiply the focal length of the lens by 1 5 for example the effect
104. Rotate tall El Slide show Note the following points e Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently available e While pressing gt or the center of the multi selector generally has the same effect as pressing there are some cases in which selection can only be made by pressing e To exit the menus and return to shooting mode press the shutter release button halfway pg 52 Help If a icon is displayed at the bottom left corner of the monitor help can be displayed by pressing the O n button A description of the currently selected option or menu will be displayed while the button is pressed Press A or W to scroll through the display a 1 Color space Active D Ligh Y Long exp NR High ISO NR 150 sensitivity settings Liveview Multiple exposure interval timer shooting O n button E Multiple exoosure Record the specified number of shots as single image Hf no operations are performed for 30 s shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be created from any photographs that have been taken 29 First Steps Charge the Battery The D300 is powered by an EN EL3e rechargeable Li ion battery supplied The EN EL3e is not fully charged at shipment To maximize shooting time charge the battery in the supplied MH 18a quick charger before use About two and a quarter hours are required to fully recharge the battery when no charge remains
105. SO sensitivity pg 94 200 ISO sensitivity auto control pg 96 Off Live view Live view mode pg 80 Hand held Release mode pg 80 Single frame Multiple exposure pg 184 Reset 2 Interval timer shooting pg 189 Reset 3 1 With the exception of Multiple exposure and Interval timer shooting only settings in the current shooting menu bank will be reset 2 Applies to all banks Reset shooting menu can not be selected while shooting is in progress 3 Applies to all banks Shooting ends when reset is performed 401 402 HE Defaults Restored with Reset Custom Settings pg 266 Option Default a1 AF C priority selection pg 267 Release a2 AF S priority selection pg 268 Focus a3 Dynamic AF area pg 269 9 points a4 Focus tracking with lock on pg 270 Normal a5 AF activation pg 271 Shutter AF ON a6 AF point illumination pg 271 Auto a7 Focus point wrap around pg 272 No wrap a8 AF point selection pg 272 51 points a9 Built in AF assist illuminator pg 273 On a10 AF ON for MB D10 pg 274 AF ON b1 ISO sensitivity step value pg 275 1 3 step b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl pg 275 1 3 step b3 Exp comp fine tune pg 275 1 3 step b4 Easy exposure compensation pg 276 Off b5 Center weighted area pg 277 8mm Fine tune optimal exposure pg 277 b6 Matr
106. SU 800 The SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 The principal features of these flash units are listed below Flash unit Feature SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB R200 2 Guide 180100 34 111 38 125 30 98 21 69 10 33 No 3 180200 48 157 53 174 42 138 30 98 14 46 Autopowerzoom 470200 24105 24 85 4 mm Wide panel mm 12 14 17 14 17 14 7 down 7 down o 60 down 90 up 90 up 90 up toward lens meni epee ttt Ee 20 uP nea A and right 90 right light axis If a color filter is attached to the SB 900 when AUTO or 4 flash is selected for white balance the camera will automatically detect the filter and adjust white balance appropriately 2 Controlled remotely with built in flash in commander mode or using optional SB 900 or SB 800 flash unit or SU 800 wireless Speedlight commander 3 m ft 20 C 68 F SB 900 SB 800 and SB 600 at 35 mm zoom head position SB 900 with standard illumination 4 27mm zoom coverage 5 24mm zoom coverage SU 800 Wireless Speedlight Commander When mounted on a CLS compatible camera the SU 800 can be used as a commander for remote SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 flash units The SU 800 itself is not equipped with a flash 358 Guide Number To calculate the range of the flash at full power divide the Guide Number by the aperture For example at ISO 100 the SB 800 has a Guide Number of 38
107. Settings are used to customize camera settings to suit individual preferences In addition to Custom Settings Custom setting bank and Custom Setting groups a Autofocus Reset custom settings settings in the 5 oa i A AF S priority selection ie Custom Settings menu are divided into Sy 2 Drnamic AF area T Focus tracking with lock on AF activation AF point illumination Focus point wrap around OFF E af AF point selectio the six groups shown at right gt S2EV steps for emosure cnt b3 Exp como fine tun Main menu y KAES eset Tona OFF MA s5 Center weiahted area 6Fine tune optimal expe CUSTOM SETTING MENU Shutter release bution AEL c2 Auto meter off delay a Autofocus D A Meitat otf delay a1 Beep b Metering exposure lt eViewinde oridi OFF c Timers AE lock aauenanaeas d Shooting display Bracketing flash 2 Viewfder sid sla 43 Viewfinder warning display 0 24 CL mode shooting speed 45 Max continuous release a6 File number sequence 41 Shooting info display G2 48 LCD illumination ra BD DiReset cus Bracketing flash a ea Flash shutter peed Flash contri for built in flash TTL Mo eling flash ON Auto bracketing set w al Auto bracketing Mode M Custom Reset custom Ba vite lec cantar bation O setting bank pg settings pg 266 266 y 13Photo info playback t4 Assign FUNC button 15 Assign preview button 1B Assign AEL AF button 11 Cust
108. W photographs color Balance 33g Can overlay two photos to make a single Image overlay 339 image BE Viewing or Printing Photographs on Other Devices Question Key phrase See page Can view my photos on TV Television playback 242 Can I view my photos in High Definition HDMI 244 Connecting to a 2 How do copy photos to my computer computer 224 How do I print photographs Printing photographs 230 Can print photos without a computer Printing via USB 231 Can I print the date on my photographs Time stamp 234 How do I order professional prints Print set DPOF 240 EE Optional Accessories Question Key phrase See page What optional flash units Speedlights Optional flash units 357 can use What lenses can use Compatible lenses 350 What AC adapters remote cords and viewfinder accessories are available for Other accessories 365 my camera What memory cards can use Approved Memory 371 cards What software is available for my Otheraccessories 368 camera Table of Contents Q amp A ING EX siisii anana iv F r Your Safety sstssesssssssscsasssscssvasvsssssesenvsinsessuesesrsivdesssscsndeiensesaseebinviae xviii NOTICES aneii aiia aaa aea Kaa aai xxi Introduction 1 OVEPVIQW inrita ir n REE NN Ea T ESN asi 2 Getting to Know the Camera csssccssssecssssecessseccssesccsnscecsnseecesseeeeee 3 Camera IBOAY ccsssssssscssssasesatncscsscesiseic
109. W recording item in the shooting menu controls compression pg 58 and bit depth pg 59 for NEF RAW images JPEG Compression JPEG images can be compressed for relatively uniform file size or optimal image quality The JPEG compression option in the shooting menu can be used to choose the type of compression pg 58 NEF RAW JPEG When photographs taken at NEF RAW JPEG fine NEF RAW JPEG normal or NEF RAW JPEG basic are viewed on the camera only the JPEG image will be displayed When photographs taken at these settings are deleted both NEF and JPEG images will be deleted The Image Quality Menu Image quality can also be adjusted using the Image quality option in the shooting menu pg 254 57 BE The JPEG Compression Menu The JPEG compression item in the shooting menu offers the following options for JPEG images Option Description Size priority Images are compressed to produce relatively His uniform file size Quality varies with scene default recorded n Optimal quality Optimal image quality File size varies with scene recorded BE The NEF RAW Recording Menu Type The NEF RAW reco rding gt Type item in the shooting menu offers the following compression options for NEF RAW images Option Description Lossless NEF images are compressed using a reversible ONS compressed algorithm reducing file size by about 20 40 default wit
110. a Deleted files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using commercially available software potentially resulting in the malicious use of personal image data Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user s responsibility Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person erase all data using commercial deletion software or format the device and then completely refill it with images containing no private information for example pictures of empty sky Be sure to also replace any pictures selected for preset manual Care should be taken to avoid injury when physically destroying data storage devices Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced by means of a scanner digital camera or other device may be punishable by law e Items prohibited by law from being copied or reproduced Do not copy or reproduce paper money coins securities government bonds or local government bonds even if such copies or reproductions are stamped Sample The copying or reproduction of paper money coins or securities which are circulated in a foreign country is prohibited Unless the prior permission of the government has been obtained the copying or reproduction of unused postage stamps or post cards issued by the government is prohibited The copying or reproduction of stamp
111. a Settings sesccsssscsssssccssssscsneesssnsecssnesecensecsenneeeeee 47 Ready the Camera ssssssssssccssssscssessesssecssseccenseessnsseessseesssuseessneess 50 FOCUS and SHOOT ecsssessesssesssesssessesssesssessscssesssesssesseesseessecasessscesecess 51 Viewing Photographs eecsssssccsseccssseccsseesesneessssees Deleting Unwanted PhotograpD6 ssccssecseeees Image Recording Options Image Quality nn eeeeccsseccnseeecsnscecenssecesnssecenssecensnecesnseesnseeees Mage SIZE sass csc aeaaeae eener reaps raant EErEE Focus Focus Mode AF Area Mode FOCUS Point SELECTION eecssessessessessscsssssessssssstssesesssssesees FOCUS Lockea erea E Manual FOCUS sssssssssssssssoossssossssesusossssesossssessosssessbsnsusososa ssossss Release Mode Choosing a Release Mode sssssssssssssssssssssssssssssesessssrssssssses Continuous Mode ssssssssssessesesstesesssseeossessseesesssstossensseesssss Framing Pictures in the Monitor Live View Self Timer MOC e ccsssesssssssssssessssscsesssssseessscesscssseeseessssesscsses Mirror up MOC ceesssescssesccsscessseessscessseccssecsueecsnecesneeesseeesseees ISO Sensitivity Choosing ISO Sensitivity Manually ssescssseeccneees Auto ISO Sensitivity Control sssss ssssssssssssssssssssssssessssrsssssss xi Exposure 99 MOTORING csssssseccusstscssssccsetsuostescsssatvaassosscceosdsicaasonsneasstiostcadbeaieizesasitaisesibe 100 Exposure MOGs accssss c
112. a test shot and view the results in the camera monitor Although there is no limit on the number of remote flash units that may be used the practical maximum is three With more than this number the light emitted by the remote flash units will interfere with performance e4 Modeling Flash If On the default setting is selected when the camera is being used with the built in flash or an optional SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 flash unit a modeling flash will be emitted when the camera depth of field preview button is pressed pg 103 No modeling flash is emitted if Off is selected e5 Auto Bracketing Set Choose the setting or settings bracketed when auto bracketing pg 116 is in effect Choose AE amp flash AE the default setting to perform both exposure and flash level bracketing AE only AE to bracket only exposure Flash only 4 to perform only flash level bracketing or WB bracketing WB to perform white balance bracketing pg 121 Note that white balance bracketing is not available at image quality settings of NEF RAW or NEF RAW JPEG 297 298 e6 Auto Bracketing Mode M This option determines which settings are affected when AE amp flash or AE only is selected for Custom Setting e5 in manual exposure mode Option Description Flash speed Camera varies shutter speed Custom Setting e5 eth default set to AE only or shutter speed and flash level Custo
113. acketing the value currently selected for white balance See page 116 for more information Fine Tuning White Balance White balance can be fine tuned to compensate for variations in the color of the light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast into an image White balance is fine tuned using the White balance option in the shooting menu or by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub command dial HE The White Balance Menu 1 Select a white balance White balance E option A Kandescent Fluorescent W Direct sunlight Select White balance in the shooting menu pg 254 then highlight a white balance i option and press If an option other than Fluorescent Choose color temp or Preset manual is selected proceed to Step 2 If Fluorescent is selected highlight a lighting type and press If Choose color temp is selected highlight a color temperature and press If Preset manual is selected choose a preset as described on page 142 before proceeding 129 130 2 Fine tune white balance EE a Use the multi selector to fine tune white balance White balance can be fine tuned on the amber A blue B axis and the green G magenta M axis The horizontal amber blue axis corresponds to color temperature with each increment equivalent to about 5 mired The vertical green magenta axis has the similar effects to the corresponding color compensation CC filters
114. ading 4 Longitude 8 Camera name 5 Altitude 9 Folder number frame NUMbET ssssssssssssssssssssssssse 258 1 Displayed only if GPS device was used when photo was taken pg 199 2 Displayed only if GPS device is equipped with electronic compass 215 HE Overview Data P 1 8000 F4 8 200 FZ ee Vc ROMS COMMENT IGP 1 Frame number 6 ISO Sensitivity total number of frames 7 Focal length ssssssssesssessseenee 2 Protect STATUS ccccsssesccsseeees 221 8 GPS data indicator 3 Camera name 9 Image comment 4 Retouch indicator 329 NA ICATOT ssstscessssssscsssseaeiconsavsassennin 5 Histogram showing the 10 Flash mode distribution of tones in the 11 Flash compensation 176 image pg 210 Horizontal axis 12 Exposure compensation 114 corresponds to pixel brightness 13 Metering method wns 100 vertical axis shows number of 14 Exposure Mode 102 pixels of each brightness in i 15 Shutter speed 106 109 image 16 Aperture a Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on 216 17 27 18 26 19 25 100ND300 DSC_ 15 E 21 20 17 Picture Control oo essences 148 24 Date of recording 37 18 Active D Lighting s 166 25 Folder nUMDET ssssssecceeesees 258 19 File MAME eee cssseescessseeeceensesees 260 26 White balance essen 125 20 Image QUAlity eesesssssssssscesssssseee 56 Color temper
115. al M Electronic range finding supported Focus point Can be selected from 51 or 11 focus points AF area mode Single point AF dynamic area AF auto area AF Focus lock Focus can be locked by pressing shutter release button halfway single servo AF or by pressing AE L AF L button Flash Built in flash Manual pop up with button release and a Guide Number of 17 56 m ft ISO 200 20 C 68 F GN at ISO 100 is 12 39 or 18 59 in manual mode m ft ISO 200 20 C 68 F GN at ISO 100 is 13 43 Flash Flash control TTL i TTL balanced fill flash and standard i TTL flash for digital SLR using 1 005 segment RGB sensor are available with built in flash and SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB 400 Auto aperture Available with SB 900 or SB 800 and CPU lens Non TTL auto Supported flash units include SB 900 SB 800 SB 28 SB 27 and SB 22s e Range priority manual Available with SB 900 and SB 800 Flash mode Front curtain sync slow sync rear curtain sync red eye reduction red eye reduction with slow sync Flash compensation 3 1 EV in increments of 1 3 1 2 or 1 EV Flash ready indicator Lights when built in flash or Speedlight such as SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB 80DX SB 28DxX or SB 50DX is fully charged blinks after flash is fired at full output Accessory shoe ISO 518 hot shoe with sync and data contacts and safety lock Nikon Creative Lighting Syste
116. all photographs in the same burst even if camera orientation is changed during shooting Rotate Tall To automatically rotate tall portrait orientation photographs for display during playback select On for the Rotate tall option in the playback menu pg 251 Note that because the camera itself is already in the appropriate orientation during shooting images are not rotated automatically during image review pg 205 317 318 USB Choose a USB option for connection to a computer or PictBridge printer Choose MTP PTP the default setting when connecting to a PictBridge printer or an optional WT 4 wireless transmitter or when using Camera Control Pro 2 available separately see page 368 See page 225 for information on selecting a USB option for use with Nikon Transfer Dust off Ref Photo Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in Capture NX version 1 3 5 or later or Capture NX 2 version 2 1 0 or later available separately for more information see the software manual Dust off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is mounted on the camera A lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is recommended When using a zoom lens zoom all the way in 1 Choose a start option Gy Dust oft ref photo Highlight one of the following options and press To exit without acquiring image dust off data press MENU e Start The message shown at right will ERE be displayed and rEF will
117. ally recorded Note that shooting will end automatically if e Atwo button reset is performed pg 182 e The camera is turned off e The battery is exhausted e Pictures are deleted Interval Timer Photography The D300 is equipped to take photographs automatically at preset intervals 1 Select Interval timer SHOO shooting O icin Dune Long exp NR Highlight Interval timer Speen shooting in the shooting i J e i menu pg 254 and press P LLB interval timer shooting Ki 2 Selecta starting trigger e Choose start time Highlight one of the following gt ea starttime Choose start time optionsand gt fie press P gt f 90 01 00 e Now Shooting begins about vs DET 3 s after settings are completed proceed to Step 4 e Start time Choose a start time see Step 3 M Before Shooting Choose single frame S continuous low speed CL or continuous high speed CH release mode when using the interval timer Before beginning interval timer photography take a test shot at current settings and view the results in the monitor Remember that the camera will focus before each shot no shots will be taken if the camera is unable to focus in single servo AF Before choosing a starting time select World time in the setup menu and make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date pg 37 Use of a tripod is recommended Mount the camera on a tripod before sh
118. amera and Battery Cautions Do not drop The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or vibration Keep dry This product is not waterproof and may malfunction if immersed in water or exposed to high levels of humidity Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage Avoid sudden changes in temperature Sudden changes in temperature such as occur when entering or leaving a heated building ona cold day can cause condensation inside the device To prevent condensation place the device ina carrying case or plastic bag before exposing it to sudden changes in temperature Keep away from strong magnetic fields Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields Strong static charges or the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor damage data stored on the memory card or affect the product s internal circuitry Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light source for an extended period Intense light may cause the image sensor to deteriorate or produce a white blur effect in photographs 379 380 Cleaning When cleaning the camera body use a blower to gently remove dust and lint then wipe gently with a soft dry cloth After using the camera at the beach or seaside wipe off any sand or salt
119. an angle Camera Control Pro 2 Camera Control Pro 2 available separately pg 368 can be used to control the camera from a computer Before connecting the camera set the camera USB option pg 225 to MTP PTP When Camera Control Pro 2 is running F will be displayed in the control panel EHE Before Connecting the Camera Install the necessary software from the supplied installer CD see the Install Guide for more information To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted be sure the camera battery is fully charged If in doubt charge the battery before use or use an EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter available separately Before connecting the camera select the USB USB option in the camera setup menu pg fj 318 and choose a USB option from MTP Y eut Mass Storage PTP default and Mass Storage as IT described below Operating system Nikon Transfer Camera Control Pro 2 e Windows Vista Service Pack 1 32 bit Home Basic Home Premium Business Enterprise Ultimate editions cies Choose e Windows XP Service Pack 3 a Vass MTP PTP Home Edition Professional g Mac 0S X version 10 3 9 10 4 11 or 10 5 4 See the websites listed on page xxiv for the latest information on supported operating systems 225 226 Direct USB Connection Connect the camera using the supplied UC E4 USB cable 1 Select a USB option Before connecting the camera to the computer make sure the co
120. and can not be used in the macro range of macro zoom lenses The flash may be unable to light the entire subject with the following lenses at ranges less than those given below Lens Zoom position Min range AF S DX 12 24mm f 4G ED 18mm 1 5 m 4 ft 11 in 20 mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in AF S 17 35mm f 2 8D ED 24mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in AF S DX 17 55mm f 2 8G ED 24mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in AF 18 35mm f 3 5 4 5D ED 18mm 1 5 m 4 ft 11 in AF S DX 18 135mm f 3 5 5 6G ED 18mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in AF S DX VR 18 200 mm f 3 5 5 6G ED 18mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in AF 20 35mm f 2 8D 20mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in 28 mm 1 5 m 4 ft 11 in AF S NIKKOR 24 70mm f 2 8G ED 35 mm 10m3 ft 3in 28 mm 1 5 m 4 ft 11 in AF S 28 70mm f 2 8D ED 3EM 1 0m 3 ft 3 in When used with the AF S NIKKOR 14 24mm f 2 8G ED the flash will be unable to light the entire subject at all ranges The built in flash can also be used with Al Al modified Nikkor Nikon Series E and non CPU lenses with a focal length of 18 300mm Al 50 300mm f 4 5 modified Al 50 300mm f 4 5 and Al 50 300mm f 4 5 ED lenses must be used at a zoom position of 135mm or above and Al 50 300mm f 4 5 ED lenses at a zoom position of 105mm or above m Red Eye Reduction Lenses that block the subject s view of the AF assist illuminator may interfere with red eye reduction 1 AF Assist Illumination AF assist illumination is not available with the following lenses AF S V
121. anel cceccssscssecsseessees 8 Camera Body Continued 3 4 flash mode button flash compensation DUON aiinsir 176 4 Flash sync terminal COVEN umiinne 364 5 Ten pin remote terminal COVEN sssisscscccinssoscandsssocasesteoss 199 369 6 Flash sync terminial 364 7 Ten pin remote terminal wc 199 369 8 Connector Cover 226 242 9 Video Connector 242 10 HDMI connector 11 DC IN connector for optional AC adapter EH 5a Or EM S sss sccsccccsscsaissaxeseassessanscicaess 365 12 USB CONNECHOF c e 226 232 13 Lens release button uu 35 14 Focus mode selector 62 71 15 Meter coupling lever 411 16 MiO uo eeeeseseseeeseeeee 79 91 376 1 AF assist illuminator 273 Self timer lamp sesescsseccsseeseeeee 90 Red eye reduction lamp 174 2 Sub command dial esses 14 3 Depth of field preview DUON ccdiscsssnsccoossnsidccsusccbeaee 103 305 4 Fn button 117 121 179 302 5 Battery chamber covet 32 6 Battery chamber cover VARCH sssssassassnnnsssosnsnssnssenscesecanesvaacerscebe 32 7 Contact cover for optional MB D10 battery pack 365 8 CPU contacts 9 Mounting index ssseeesseeene 10 LENS MOUNT ee seesseseseesseeneeene 11 Tripod socket 12 Body cap Camera Body Continued 1 Viewfinder ey
122. appear in Clean sensor and then start the viewfinder and control panel FF 2 oto of brat i a Etr displays E Focus will be set to infinity e Clean sensor and then start Select this option to clean the image sensor before starting The message shown at right will be displayed and rEF will rEF appear in the viewfinder and control panel displays when cleaning is rEF complete vV Image Sensor Cleaning Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed Select Clean image sensor and then start only if the dust off reference data will not be used with existing photographs 2 Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder With the lens about ten centimeters four inches from a well lit featureless white object frame the object so that it fills the viewfinder and then press the shutter release button halfway In autofocus mode focus will automatically be set to infinity in manual focus mode set focus to infinity manually 319 320 3 Acquire dust off reference data Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to acquire Image Dust Off reference data The monitor turns off when the shutter release button is pressed If the reference object is too bright or too dark the camera may be unable to acquire Image Dust Off reference data an and the message shown at right will be aa
123. ard is inserted Note that Battery 321 info option is not available when camera is powered by an optional AC adapter 390 Error Messages This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in the viewfinder control panel and monitor Indicator Control View panel finder Problem Solution Page Lens aperture ringis Set ring to minimum FEE za not set to minimum aperture largest 35 blinks aperture f number lt a ca Low battery Ready a fully charged 44 spare battery e Battery exhausted e Recharge or replace battery e Battery can notbe Contact Nikon used authorized service representative e An extremely e Replace the battery a Ca A exhausted or recharge the xxiii 30 blinks blinks rechargeable Li ion battery if the 32 battery or a third rechargeable Li ion party battery is battery is exhausted inserted either in the camera or in the optional MB D10 battery pack Camera clock is not set Set camera clock 37 blinks 391 Indicator Control View panel finder Problem Solution Page No lens attached or non CPU lens attached without specifying Aperture value will be AF maximum aperture displayed if maximum 196 Aperture shown in aperture is specified stops from maximum aperture Camera unable to blinks focus using autofocus Focus manually a Use a lower ISO 94 sensitivity In
124. arrow adjacent to the highlighted image A V lt or P to switch between the source image and the retouched copy To view the highlighted picture full frame press and hold the amp button If the copy was created from two images using Image overlay press A or W to view the other source image To exit to playback mode press the gt button To exit to playback mode with the highlighted image displayed press or the center of the multi selector Source Retouched image copy vV Side by Side Comparison The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a photograph that has since been deleted is currently protected pg 221 or hidden pg 249 or contains embedded image authentication information pg 323 343 My Menu Creating a Custom Menu The My Menu option can be used to create and edit a customized list of options from the playback shooting Custom Settings setup and retouch menus for quick access up to 20 items If desired recent settings can be displayed in place of My Menu pg 348 Options can be added deleted and reordered as described below For information on basic menu operations see Tutorial Camera Menus pg 24 Adding Options to My Menu 1 Select Add items MY MENU Image quality PEG ssion In My Menu 2 highlig ht Add PAN x N RAW recording items and press gt f N z t4 Assign FUNC button T Remove items 7 Rank items El Ch
125. assist illuminator lights The built in flash must be raised so that it can emit monitor pre flashes Group A Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group A TTL i TTL mode Choose flash compensation from values between 3 0 and 3 0 EV in increments of 3 EV Auto aperture available only with SB 900 and SB 800 flash AA units Choose flash compensation from values between 3 0 and 3 0 EV in increments of 1 3 EV M Choose the flash level from values between Full and 1 128 1 128 of full power The flash units in this group do not fire Group B Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group B The options available are the same as those listed for Group A above Channel Choose from channels 1 4 All flash units in both groups must be set to the same channel 293 294 Follow the steps below to take photographs in commander mode 1 Adjust settings for the built in flash Choose the flash control mode and output level for the built in flash Note that output level can not be adjusted in mode o Flash entri for built in flash Commander mode Mode Comp fi Builtin flash ES 075 oe Group A gj Group B TLE 0 Channel BH Move Set WOK 2 Adjust settings for group A Choose the flash control mode and output level for the flash units in group A Flash entri for built in flash lt Commander mode ASRS ey Group A Group B Channel Move 3 Adjust s
126. ation from I ciocnevrat o2 C103 WONOCHROME 02 slots 1 through 99 and press amp ann to save the selected Picture ae Control to the memory card 107 Unused Any Picture Controls that may already have been saved to the selected slot will be overwritten Saving Custom Picture Controls Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at any one time The memory card can only be used to store user created custom Picture Controls The Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera can not be copied to the memory card Managing Custom Picture Controls Follow the steps below to rename or delete custom Picture Controls BE Renaming Custom Picture Controls 1 Select Rename In the Manage Picture Control menu highlight Rename and press gt iy Manage Picture Contro a Save edit Delete Load save 2 Select a Picture Control Highlight a custom Picture Control C 1 through C 9 and press gt O Ren 3 S01 VIVID 02 Lay lt E302 STANDARD 02 3 Rename the Picture Control Rename the Picture Control as described on page 156 1 S 8 40123456789 lt gt 7 BBCDEFGHIJKL UNOPQRSTUVAXYZ ViViD 02___ GCursor input CHOK 161 EE Deleting Custom Picture Controls from the Camera 1 Select Delete iy Manage Picture Control a In the Manage Picture Control ia menu highlight Delete and 6 N p press gt i Load save 2 Select a
127. atted or anew memory card inserted in the camera file numbering continues from the last number used or from the largest file number in the current folder whichever is higher If a photograph is taken when the current folder contains a photograph numbered 9999 a new folder will be created automatically and file numbering will begin again from 0001 File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created the memory card is formatted or a new memory card is inserted in the camera Note that a new folder is created automatically if a photograph is taken when the current folder contains 999 photographs Same as for On except that the next photograph taken is assigned a file number by adding one to the largest file number in the current folder If the folder is empty file numbering is reset to 0001 On default Off RESET Reset M File Number Sequence If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999 photographs or a photograph numbered 9999 the shutter release button will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken Choose Reset for Custom Setting d6 File number sequence and then either format the current memory card or insert a new memory card 283 284 d7 Shooting Info Display At the default setting of Auto AUTO the color of the lettering in the information display pg 12 will automatically change from black to white or white to black to maintain contrast with th
128. ature 133 21 MAJE S ZE veesssssscsssssesesnsssesssesene 60 White balance fine tuning 129 22 Image authentication Preset manual INd CAtOT oasesssssssssscssssesssesssssceee 323 27 Color SpaCe s s ssssssssrssssssseserererere 23 Time of recording 37 217 Viewing Multiple Images Thumbnail Playback To display images in contact sheets of four or nine images press the 9 button Full frame Thumbnail playback 218 The following operations can be performed while thumbnails are displayed To Use Description Press 9E button to zoom out Display more Qe from one to four images per page images Press again to display nine images per page Press amp button to zoom in from Display fewer Q nine to four images per page images Press again to display highlighted image full frame Toggle full frame playback Press center of multi selector to switch back and forth between full frame and thumbnail playback Highlight images Use multi selector to highlight images for full frame playback playback zoom pg 220 or deletion pg 222 Delete highlighted See page 222 for more EE photo a information Change protect See page 221 for more Status of om ons highlighted photo i Return to shooting F Io Monitor will turn off Photographs mode can be taken immediately Display menus MENU See page 245 for more
129. aximum aperture at ISO equivalent of 200 400 800 1600 3200 5 5 6 7 1 8 10 For each one step increase in sensitivity e g from 200 to 400 aperture is stopped down by half an f stop If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above the maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens When an SC series 17 28 or 29 sync cable is used for off camera flash photography correct exposure may not be achieved in i TTL mode We recommend that you choose spot metering to select standard i TTL flash control Take a test shot and view the results in the monitor In i TTL use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash unit Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels as this may produce incorrect exposure M Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories Use only Nikon Speedlights Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal operation but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash Before using a Nikon Speedlight not listed in this section contact a Nikon authorized service representative for more information 363 Flash Contacts The D300 is equipped with an accessory shoe for attaching optional flash units directly to the camera and a sync terminal that allows flash units to be connected via a sync cable BE The Accessory Shoe Use the accessory shoe to mount optional flash units directly on the camera with
130. ayed in the control panel Control panel WB button Main command dial The White Balance Menu White balance can also be adjusted using the White balance option in the shooting menu pg 254 Fluorescent Selecting 3 fluorescent with the WB button and main command dial selects the type of bulb chosen for the Fluorescent option in the white balance menu pg 254 127 128 Studio Flash Lighting Auto white balance may not produce the desired results with large studio flash units Choose a color temperature use preset white balance or set white balance to Flash and use fine tuning to adjust white balance Color Temperature The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other conditions Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source defined with reference to the temperature to which an object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same wavelengths While light sources with a color temperature in the neighborhood of 5 000 5 500K appear white light sources with a lower color temperature such as incandescent light bulbs appear slightly yellow or red Light sources with a higher color temperature appear tinged with blue See Also When WB bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e5 Auto bracketing set pg 297 the camera will create several images each time the shutter is released White balance will be varied with each image br
131. balanced Contrast combination of settings using Quick adjust Pis or make manual adjustments to individual ss settings 1 Select a Picture Control E andard ESNL Neutral EVI Vivid On i ENC Monochrome Highlight the desired Picture Control in the Set Picture Control menu pg 148 and press gt KEDA Dci Cadut Adjust settings Vivid O Quick adiust Press A or W to highlight the Ze Sharpening Y Contrast desired setting and press lt q or lt amp gt iam gt to choose a value pg 151 a Repeat this step until all settings have been adjusted or select Quick adjust to choose a preset combination of settings Default settings can be restored by pressing the t button 3 Press Modifications to Original Picture Controls Picture Controls that have been modified from Set Picture Control default settings are indicated by an asterisk X n ma in the Set Picture Control menu C 0 ENC Monochrome 2 G Grid GaAdiust EH Picture Control Settings Option Description Quick adjust Choose from options between 2 and 2 to reduce or exaggerate the effect of the selected Picture Control note that this resets all manual adjustments For example choosing positive values for Vivid makes pictures more vivid Not available with Neutral Monochrome or custom Picture Controls Sharpening Control the sharpness of outlines Select A to adju
132. battery chamber cover is required when using EN EL4a or EN EL4 batteries It is equipped with a shutter release button AF ON button multi selector and main and sub command dials for improved operation when taking photographs in portrait tall orientation When attaching the MB D10 remove contact cover for the MB D10 from the camera Quick Charger MH 18a pg 30 The MH 18a can be used to recharge EN EL3e battery AC Adapter EH 5a EH 5 These AC adapters can be used to power the camera for extended periods Wireless LAN adapters Wireless Transmitter WT 4 Connects the camera to wireless and Ethernet networks The photographs on the camera memory card can be viewed by computers on the same network or copied to a computer for long term storage The camera can also be controlled from any computer on the network using Camera Control Pro 2 available separately Note that the WT 4 requires an independent power source an EH 6 AC adapter or a second EN EL3e battery is recommended See the WT 4 manual for details 365 366 Viewfinder eyepiece accessories e Diopter Adjustment Viewfinder Lens DK 20C To accommodate individual differences in vision viewfinder lenses are available with diopters of 5 4 3 2 0 0 5 1 2 and 3 m Use diopter adjustment lenses only if the desired focus can not be achieved with the built in diopter adjustment control 2 to 1 m Test diopter adjustment lenses before purcha
133. before the exposure meters turn off automatically can be adjusted using Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay pg 279 Camera Off Display If the camera is turned off with a battery and memory card inserted the frame count and number of exposures remaining will be displayed 547 some memory cards may only display this information when the camera is on Control panel Adjust Camera Settings This tutorial describes how to take photos at default settings T Check camera settings mode Ea quality White balance i25 sem 5477 A p5 565P G zooa ISO sensitivity Control panel Viewfinder display Default settings are listed below Option Default Description Page inane NORM Record JPEG images at a compression ratio a JPEG of roughly 1 8 Ideal for snapshots 56 qua ty normal Size priority selected for JPEG compression L 523 Image size Large Images are 4 288 x 2 848 pixels in size 60 Iso 200 ISO sensitivity digital equivalent of film 94 sensitivity speed set to ISO 200 White AUTO White balance is adjusted automatically for 126 balance Auto natural colors under most types of lighting P Camera automatically adjusts shutter Exposure z mode Programmed speed and aperture for optimal exposure in 102 auto most situations Center Focus focus point p 5 66 point single point AF Focus point Viewfinder focus point display is shown ab
134. c4 Monitor off Delay This option controls how long the monitor remains on when no operations are performed Choose from 10 s 20 s 1 minute 5 minutes or 10 minutes Choose a shorter monitor off delay for longer battery life Regardless of the setting chosen the monitor remains on if no operations are performed for about ten minutes when the camera is powered by an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter Option 2s 2s Obs 5s Oils 10 s default Oils 20s Option Dils 10s DAs 20 s default im 1min m 5min in 10 min d Shooting Display d1 Beep Choose High or Low to sound a beep when the self timer is used or the camera focuses in single servo autofocus note that a beep will not sound if Release is selected for Custom Setting a2 AF S priority selection pg 268 Option Description High Choose the pitch of the beep OH default from High and Low A icon is displayed in the control panel N L Low and shooting information DA displays Off Turn the beep speaker off d2 Viewfinder Grid Display Choose whether on demand grid lines are displayed in the viewfinder or in live view mode in the monitor for reference when composing photographs Option Description On On demand grid lines displayed Off default On demand grid lines not displayed 281 282 d3 Viewfinder Warning Display Choose whether low batte
135. circle can be setto 10 610mm 6 8 10 or 13 mm or to the average ofthe 13 613 mm entire frame Avg Average Note that the diameter is fixed at 8 mm when a non CPU lens is used regardless of the setting selected for Non CPU lens data in the setup menu pg 196 b6 Fine Tune Optimal Exposure Use this option to fine tune the exposure value selected by the camera Exposure can be fine tuned separately for each metering method by from 1 to 1 EV in steps of 1 6 EV 1 Select Custom Setting b6 Ee 28Fine tune optimal exposure Highlight Custom Setting b6 PRA Deren arasan ka Fine tune optimal exposure defeat valve Continon and press gt Yes 2 Noo o 3 277 2 Select Yes The message shown at right will be displayed highlight Yes and press to proceed or select No to exit without altering exposure iy dG Fine tune optimal exposure GP Exposure compensation icon g is not displayed when exposure is altered from the M default value Continue 2 No 3 Selecta metering method Highlight Matrix metering Center weighted or Spot metering and press gt E b6 Fine tune optimal exposure Y a Center weighted E Spot metering 4 Choose an exposure value Press A or W to choose an exposure value from 1 to 1 EV Press to save changes and exit m Fine Tuning Exposure iy b6Fine tune optimal exposure Matrix metering Exposu
136. cm 8 in GPS Adapter Cord MC 35 pg 199 Connects GPS devices to D300 via PC cable supplied by manufacturer of GPS device allowing latitude longitude altitude Coordinated Universal Time UTC pg 202 and heading to be recorded with photographs length 35 cm 14 in GPS Unit GP 1 pg 199 Record latitude longitude altitude and UTC time with pictures Modulite Remote Control Set ML 3 Allows infrared remote control at ranges of up to 8 m 26 ft BE Approved Memory Cards The following cards have been tested and approved for use in the D300 SanDisk Lexar Media 8 GB ee 8 GB rofessiona jo Extreme IV SDCFX4 4GB UDMA 300 x 4GB 2GB 2 GB 8 GB 2 GB 4GB 80 x 1GB Extreme III SDCFX3 ica Platinum II S12 MB 1GB 60 x 4GB 8 GB 8 GB 4GB 4GB Ultra Il SDCFH eB RRON 133 x WA es or rofessiona ic 4GB 2 GB Standard SDCFB 2GB SOE STONE 1GB Microdrive DSCM 11000 1GB 3K4 2 2 GB 3K4 4 4GB 3K6 6 GB Other cards have not been tested For more details on the above cards please contact the manufacturer 371 372 Caring for the Camera Storage When the camera will not be used for an extended period replace the monitor cover remove the battery and store the battery in a cool dry area with the terminal cover in place To prevent mold or mildew store the camera in a dry well ventilated area Do not store your camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locati
137. combination mD with the command dials Preview IN command dials The options available are the same as for FUNC button press pg 302 and FUNC button dials pg 304 except that the default option for Preview button press is Preview and the default setting for Preview command dials is None 305 f6 Assign AE L AF L Button Choose the role played by the AE L AF L button either by itself AE L AF L button press or when used in combination with the command dials AE L AF L command e dials The options available for AE L AF L if X button press are the same as for FUNC button press pg 302 except that AE L AF L button press defaults to AE AF lock and has an additional AF 0N option if this option is selected pressing the AE L AF L button has the same effect as pressing the AF ON button to initiate autofocus The options available for AE L AF L command dials are the same as for FUNC button dials pg 304 except that AE L AF L command dials defaults to None and lacks 1 step spd aperture option 306 f7 Customize Command Dials This option controls the operation of the main and sub command dials Option Description Controls the direction of the command dials Choose No Reverse the default option for normal command dial operation or rotation Yes to reverse the rotation of the command dials This setting also applie
138. commended when taking photographs that will be printed without modification or viewed in applications that do not support color management or when taking photographs that will be printed with ExifPrint the direct printing option on some household printers or kiosk printing or other commercial print services Adobe RGB photographs can also be printed using these options but colors will not be as vivid JPEG photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space are Exif 2 21 and DCF 2 0 compliant applications and printers that support Exif 2 21 and DCF 2 0 will select the correct color space automatically If the application or device does not support Exif 2 21 and DCF 2 0 select the appropriate color space manually An ICC color profile is embedded in TIFF photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space allowing applications that support color management to automatically select the correct color space For more information see the documentation provided with the application or device Nikon Software The following Nikon software automatically selects the correct color space when opening photographs created with the D300 ViewNX version 1 2 0 or later Capture NX version 1 3 5 or later available separately and Capture NX 2 version 2 1 0 or later available separately Flash Photography Using the Built in Flash This chapter describes how to use the built in flash Me BuiltsimFlaSMicccccessscecssccccescerscssssecccsecccesesesesesossecesee
139. could result in strangulation Observe proper precautions when handling batteries Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled Observe the following precautions when handling batteries for use in this product Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment Do not short or disassemble the battery Be sure the product is off before replacing the battery If you are using an AC adapter be sure it is unplugged Do not attempt to insert the battery upside down or backwards Do not expose the battery to flame or to excessive heat Do not immerse in or expose to water Replace the terminal cover when transporting the battery Do not transport or store the battery with metal objects such as necklaces or hairpins Batteries are prone to leakage when fully discharged To avoid damage to the product be sure to remove the battery when no charge remains When the battery is not in use attach the terminal cover and store in a cool dry place The battery may be hot immediately after use or when the product has been used on battery power for an extended period Before removing the battery turn the camera off and allow the battery to cool Discontinue use immediately should you notice any changes in the battery such as discoloration or deformation xix A Observe proper precautions when handling the quick charger Keep dry Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or electric shock
140. crement Pressing the Fn button rotate the sub command dial to choose the exposure increment A N Exposure increment Fn button Sub command Control panel dial At default settings the size of the increment can be chosen from 1 3 3 and 1 EV The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 3 EV are listed below Control panel display No of shots Bracketing order EVs DET J ee Dis asais 0 0 r Rg 3 0 3 0 0 7 oo Fe no 3 0 3 0 7 0 2 E aa 2 0 0 3 pring 2 0 0 3 Fe no 3 0 0 3 0 3 5 E aa 5 0 0 7 0 3 0 3 0 7 0 1 0 0 7 0 3 0 3 FU E TP 1 P eeneet CF S aa 7 0 7 1 0 0 1 3 1 0 0 7 0 3 PUD ices T PREE GP DJ toviti 2 0 3 0 7 1 0 1 3 See Also For information on choosing the size of the exposure increment see Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl pg 275 For information on choosing the order in which bracketing is performed see Custom Setting e7 Bracketing order pg 299 4 Framea photograph focus and shoot eg The camera will vary exposure and or flash level shot by shot according to the bracketing program selected Modifications to exposure are added to those made with exposure compensation see page 114 making it possible to achieve exposure compensation values of more than 5 EV While bracketing is in effect a bracketing progress indicator will be displayed in th
141. csueecsueesnseesnscessees 167 Flash Photography 169 The Built in Flash ou esssssscsssecssscessccessecssscccnscesseecasccsscecsneessneecsseeess 170 Using the Built in FlaSh ssssssssssssssessssssseessssssesessesessssseenesesssressssssens 171 Flash MOES ssssscssssssssccssscesecssscesstcessesessscesseecsseessuccesnecsssecsncessneesies 174 Flash Compensation ceessesecseecssscesscesstccsseeceseccssceessecsseeceseecsseecsees 176 BEV WHO CH E RAEE AE A AT 178 xii Other Shooting Options 181 Two Button Reset Restoring Default Settings esse 182 Multiple EXPOSULE sissies 184 Interval Timer Photography sssessccssssccssesecssssecsssesecsneeeesseeeees 189 Non CPU Lenses Using a GPS Unit More About Playback 203 Full Frame Playback ssesscsssssccssseccssesecessssccssssecssseecsnsnsecsnseeesnseess 204 Photo INFOrmation esssessccsssccssescessssecessssccssseecsnesecsnseseesnseecsnneeess 206 Viewing Multiple Images Thumbnail Playback eee 218 Taking a Closer Look Playback ZOOM ssssssssssssscnseesecneeseesees 220 Protecting Photographs from Deletion ssssscsssssscnseeecneees 221 Deleting Individual Photographs sesssssesscssesecensesccsnetecesseeees 222 Connections 223 CONNECTING to a COMPUTES wu eseccescsessseesseessessssesseesseessessssesseessees Direct USB Connection Wireless and Ethernet Networks uu ceeesscssssessssessssessesssneeeseeens 229 Printing Photograph S s
142. cted for Release mode the monitor will turn off while the shutter release button is pressed 1 No Picture After shooting play the picture back in the monitor to ensure that the photograph has been recorded Note that the sound the mirror makes when the shutter release button is pressed halfway or the AF ON button is pressed can be mistaken for the sound of the shutter and that pressing the shutter release button all the way down when the camera is unable to focus in single servo AF will end live view without a photograph being recorded Tripod Mode 2 1 Ready the camera Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable level surface Select live view mode Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to Ly 0 Release mode dial Adjust Live view options in the shooting menu Select Live view inthe shooting menu emne and choose Tripod for Live view a aa mode Release mode options can be selected as described on page 80 P eq Handheld 7 Sl 2 Tripod Frame a picture AF ON button in the viewfinder Frame a picture in the viewfinder and select a focus point using the multi selector then press the AF 0N button The camera will focus normally and set exposure Note that the camera can NOT be focused by pressing the shutter release button halfway 83 p 84 5 P
143. cus mode pg 62 2 Auto area AF is chosen for AF area mode pg 64 or single point or dynamic area AF is chosen and the center focus point is selected Off The AF assist illuminator does not light to assist the focus operation The camera may not be able to focus using autofocus when lighting is poor The AF Assist Illuminator The AF assist illuminator has a range of about 0 5 3 0 m 1 ft 8 in 9 ft 10 in when using the illuminator use a lens with a focal length of 24 200 mm and remove the lens hood See Also See page 355 for restrictions on the lenses that can be used with AF assist 273 274 a10 AF On for MB D10 Choose the function assigned to 7 the AF ON button on the optional 5 MB D10 battery pack eg yp Ag N Option Description AF ON Pressing the MB D10 AF ON button initiates AF ON default autofocus i AE AF lock Focus and exposure lock while the MB D10 AF ON button is pressed fia AE lock only Exposure locks while the MB D10 AF ON button is pressed AE lock Reset on release me Exposure locks when the MB D10 AF 0N button is pressed and remains locked until the button is pressed a second time the shutter is released or the exposure meters turn off mS AE lock Hold Exposure locks when the MB D10 AF ON button is pressed and remains locked until the button is pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn
144. d aperture for Programmed f Ehio optimal exposure Recommended for snapshots i pg 104 and in other situations in which there is little time p9 to adjust camera settings Shutter priority User chooses shutter speed camera selects 5 auto aperture for best results Use to freeze or blur pg 106 motion User chooses aperture camera selects shutter Aperture ee speed for best results Use to blur background for A priority auto portraits or bring both foreground and pg 107 background into focus for landscape shots User controls both shutter speed and aperture Manual fe OE oe M 0g 109 Set shutter speed to tus i for long time p9 exposures Lens Types When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring pg 352 lock the aperture ring at the minimum aperture highest f number Type G lenses are not equipped with an aperture ring Non CPU lenses can only be used in exposure mode A aperture priority auto and M manual In other modes exposure mode A is automatically selected when a non CPU lens is attached The exposure mode indicator F or 5 in the control panel will blink and A will be displayed in the viewfinder 102 To choose the exposure mode press the MODE MODE button button and rotate the main command dial until the desired mode is displayed in the control panel or viewfinder Main command dial Depth of Field Preview To preview the effects of aperture pres
145. d dial is used to and display additional photo information in full frame playback playback pray P p ay and to move the cursor up or down during thumbnail playback While menus are displayed rotating the sub command dial right displays the sub menu for the selected option while rotating it left displays the previous menu To make a selection press the center of the multi selector or f8 Release Button to Use Dial This option allows adjustments that are normally made by holding a button and rotating a command dial to be made by rotating the command dial after the button is released At the default setting of No the button must be pressed while the command dial is rotated If Yes is selected the setting can be changed by rotating the command dial after the button is released Setting ends when the button is pressed again the shutter release button is pressed halfway or any of the MODE 4 ISO QUAL or WB button is pressed Except when No limit is selected for Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay or an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter is used setting will also end when the exposure meters turn off f9 No Memory Card At the default setting of Enable release the shutter can be released when no memory card is inserted although no pictures will be recorded they will however be displayed in the monitor in demo mode If Release locked is selected the shutter release button is only enabled when a memo
146. d the number of exposures that can be stored in the memory buffer pg 77 will be shown in the viewfinder display For information on what to do if the camera is unable to focus using autofocus see Getting Good Results with Autofocus pg 70 51 52 2 Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to shoot 7 Smoothly press the shutter N release button the rest of the way down to take the picture While the photograph is being recorded to the memory card the access lamp next to the card slot cover will light Do not eject the memory card turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source until the lamp has gone out Access lamp The Shutter Release Button The camera has a two stage shutter release button The camera focuses when the shutter release button is pressed halfway To take the photograph press the shutter release button the rest of the way down Hey Focus Take photograph Viewing Photographs 1 Press the button A photograph will be displayed in the monitor 2 View additional pictures Additional pictures can be displayed by pressing lt or gt To view additional information on the current photograph press A and W pg 206 E2 Select R G B To end playback and return to shooting mode press the shutter release button halfway Image Review When On is s
147. e background To always use the same color lettering select Manual and choose Dark on light B black lettering or Light on dark W white lettering Monitor brightness will automatically be adjusted for maximum contrast with the selected text color Dark on light Light on dark d8 LCD Illumination At the default setting of Off the control panel backlight LCD illuminator will only light while the power switch is in the 8 position If On is selected the control panel will be illuminated while the exposure meters are active pg 46 Select Off for increased battery life d9 Exposure Delay Mode At the default setting of Off shutter is released when the shutter release button is pressed When shooting with Tripod selected in live view mode pg 83 or in situations where the slightest camera movement can blur pictures On can be selected to delay shutter release until about 1 s after the shutter release button is pressed and the mirror is raised d10 MB D10 Battery Type To ensure that the camera functions as expected when eight AA batteries are used in the optional MB D10 battery pack match the option selected in this menu to the type of batteries inserted in the battery pack There is no need to adjust this option when using EN EL3e or optional EN EL4a or EN EL4 batteries Option Description BLR6 LR6 AA alkaline Select when using LR6 alkaline AA batteries BNiHH HR6 AA Ni MH Select when using HR
148. e Cntrl 275 b3 Exp Comp Fine Tune 275 b4 Easy Exposure Compensation 276 b5 Center Weighted Area ssssscssssecsssessesnsecssseseecnecsssees 277 b6 Fine Tune Optimal ExPOSure sessssssssecsseesssessseesssees 277 Timers AE LOCK ccchssssstecsstncasurcase teccsenstugersesatalesstveassceasiaelasesaas 279 C1 Shutter Release Button AE L wn eeesecssssssessecssseessecnssees 279 c2 Auto Meter off Delay ais c3 Self Timer Delay ssssssssssssssseccssecessuseccsueeessueecesneeessneeees C4 Monitor Off Delay u eesssssssssecsssessccsecssseeecssseesssneecesseees SSHOOLING DISPIAY cssisssessissasscccaissesassccsnscvasaanaiscesscovesssantsaasssbconane AT BES pp SE E E EE d3 Viewfinder Warning Display d4 CL Mode Shooting Speed 282 d5 Max Continuous Release cessscsssesccsseseesseeceeneeecenseees 282 d6 File Number Sequence ssesssssssessosssoesssssssssssssssseeee 283 d7 Shooting Info Display sssssssccsssssccsseecesseecssneeessneeees 284 d8 LCD Illumination ssssssssssssssssssssessssssseressssseresssssserresssssrre 285 d9 Exposure Delay Mode d10 MB D10 Battery Type d11 Battery Order 287 Bracketing Flash on sssessssssssecsccsssesseccssseesecssnssecsessssesesssnssessees 288 e1 Flash Sync Speed ou ssesscsssesccesseccssesecessecsssseecesseesennteceeneees 288 e2 Flash Shutter SPCC sesssssssssessssscssscssecssscssse
149. e activated if the actual shutter speed is faster than 320 s Use auto FP high speed sync with SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SB R200 flash units If other flash units are 1 250s used shutter speed is set to 250 s When the camera Auto FP shows a shutter speed of 250 s in exposure mode F or A auto FP high speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter speed is faster than 1 250 s 1 250 s default Flash sync speed set to 1 250 s 1 200 s Flash sync speed set to 200 s 1 160 s Flash sync speed set to 160 s 1 125s Flash sync speed set to 1 125 s 1 100 s Flash sync speed set to 100 s 1 80s Flash sync speed set to 1 80 s 1 60s Flash sync speed set to 1 60 s Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit To fix shutter speed at the sync speed limit in shutter priority auto or manual exposure modes select the next shutter speed after the slowest possible shutter speed 30 s or bulb An X flash sync indicator will be displayed in the control panel and viewfinder Auto FP High Speed Sync Allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter speed supported by the camera making it possible to choose the maximum aperture for reduced depth of field 288 Flash Control at 1 320 s Auto FP When 1 320 s Auto FP is selected for Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed pg 288 the built in flash can be used at shutter speeds as fast as 320 s while optional SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SB R200 flash units
150. e bottom of the cover until it clicks into place To remove the cover hold the camera firmly and pull the bottom of the cover gently outwards as shown at right 19 20 The DK 23 Viewfinder Eyepiece Cup Before attaching the DK 5 viewfinder eyepiece cap and other viewfinder accessories pp 89 366 remove the DK 23 viewfinder eyepiece cup by placing your fingers underneath the flanges on either side and sliding it off as shown at right The DK 5 viewfinder eyepiece cap is used in self timer pg 89 and interval timer photography pg 189 Quick Start Guide Follow these steps for a quick start with the D300 1 Charge the battery pg 30 2 Insert the battery pg 32 3 Attach a lens pg 34 Mounting index 4 insert a memory card pg 39 Front 5 Turn the camera on pg 44 For information on choosing a language and setting the time and date see page 36 See page 43 for information on adjusting viewfinder focus 21 6 Check camera settings pp 44 47 D C magee Jp coy eT i ea Tn Number of exposures remainin image quality on E E mA White balance H Control panel Viewfinder display 7 Select single servo autofocus pp 49 62 Rotate the focus mode selector to single servo autofocus 8 Focus and shoot pp 51 52
151. e center focus point Highlight active Pressing the center of the multi selector in SENE focus point shooting mode highlights the active focus point Pressing the center of the multi selector has Not used no effect when the camera is in shooting mode EE Playback Mode Selecting Playback mode displays the following options Option Description Thumbnail 3 Press the center of the multi selector to toggle on off between full frame and thumbnail playback default F In both full frame and thumbnail playback a View EE histogram is displayed while the center of the multi histograms selector is pressed Press the center of the multi selector to toggle between full frame or thumbnail playback and Zoom on _ playback zoom Choose the initial zoom setting from off Low magnification Medium magnification and High magnification The zoom display will center on the active focus point Option Description Pressing center of multi selector displays list of folders Highlight folder and press to select folder panes for playback Folder can not be changed if only one folder exists of if Current is selected for Playback folder pg 249 f2 Multi Selector If Reset meter off delay is selected operating the multi selector when the exposure meters are off pg 46 will activate the exposure meters If Do nothing the default option is selected the exposure meters will
152. e control panel A segment will disappear from the indicator after each shot Exposure increment Exposure increment Exposure increment OEV 1EV 1 EV 119 120 BE Canceling Bracketing To cancel bracketing press the Fn button and rotate the main command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero GF and ii is no longer displayed in the control panel on top of the camera The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two button reset pg 182 although in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated Exposure and Flash Bracketing In single frame and self timer modes one shot will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed In continuous low speed and continuous high speed modes shooting will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken Shooting will resume the next time the shutter release button is pressed If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been taken shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to make room on the memory card If the camera is turned off before all shots in the sequence have been taken bracketing will resume from the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on
153. e frame rate with an EN EL3e battery continuous servo AF manual or shutter priority auto exposure a shutter speed of 250 s or faster other settings at default values and memory remaining in memory buffer To choose a release mode press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to the desired setting Release mode dial lock release Release mode dial m 75 Continuous Mode To take pictures in CH continuous high speed and Ct continuous low speed modes 1 Select CH or Ct mode Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to CH or CL Release mode p dial 2 Framea photograph focus and shoot While the shutter release button is SU pressed all the way down pictures will be taken at up to 6 fps in continuous high speed mode or at the frame rate selected for Custom Setting d4 CL mode shooting speed pg 282 in continuous low speed mode 76 Power Source and Frame Rate The maximum frame advance rate varies with the power source used Power source Maximum frame advance rate Battery EN EL3e 6 fps 2 AC adapter 8 fps MB D10 battery pack 2 with EN EL3e battery 6 fps MB D10 battery pack 8 fos3 with EN EL4a battery p MB D10 battery pack 8 fps3 with AA size batteries 4 1 Average frame rate with continuous servo AF manual or shutter priori
154. e lit frame the photograph focus and shoot FV lock pg 178 can be used if desired 295 296 The Flash Sync Mode Display 4 does not appear in the control panel flash sync mode display when is selected for Built in flash gt Mode Flash Compensation The flash compensation value selected with the 5 button and sub command dial is added to the flash compensation values selected for the built in flash group A and group B in the Commander mode menu A icon is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder when a flash compensation value other than 0 is selected for Built in flash gt TTL The Ei icon flashes when the built in flash is in mode M M Commander Mode Position the sensor windows on the remote flash units to pick up the monitor preflashes from the built in flash particular care is required when not using a tripod Be sure that direct light or strong reflections from the remote flash units do not enter the camera lens in TTL mode or the photocells on the remote flash units AA mode as this may interfere with exposure To prevent timing flashes emitted by the built in flash from appearing in photographs taken at short range choose low ISO sensitivities or small apertures large f numbers or use an optional SG 3IR infrared panel for the built in flash An SG 3IR is required for best results with rear curtain sync which produces brighter timing flashes After positioning the remote flash units take
155. e sub command dial to choose the white balance adjustment Each increment is roughly equivalent to 5 mired Fn button Sub command dial White balance increment Control panel Choose from increments of 1 5 mired 2 10 mired or 3 15 mired Higher B values correspond to increased amounts of blue higher A values to increased amounts of amber pg 130 The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are listed below No of White balance Control panel display shots increment Bracketing order EVs ia inresa Diniidiihins s s I 0 1 0 ir i Hae f rerni ET H 3 1B 1B 0 2B HJE Vs EP TE H 3 1A 1A 2A 0 ber eer RE 2 1B 0 1B Aer HE pusere Qie 2 1A O 1A JE fresce ee 3 1A 1B 0 1A 1B pt SF et ee 5 1A 1B 0 2A 1A 1B 2B 0 3A 2A 1A Uniig aamen TEP eersatnier es 7 1A 1B 1B 2B 3B 0 4A 3A 2A 1A EPC opr ere GF prerast 9 1A1B 15B 2B 3B 4B See Also See page 131 for a definition of mired 122 4 Framea photograph focus and 7 shoot a Each shot will be processed to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program and each copy will have a different white balance Modifications to white balance are added to the white balance adjustment made with white balance fine tuning If the number of shots in the bracketing program is greater than the number of exposures remai
156. e system as described below Windows Vista Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon i in the taskbar and select Safely a ey Remove Hawas Remove USB Mass Storage Device from the menu that appears Windows XP Home Edition Windows XP Professional Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the taskbar and select Safely OET hr remove USB Mass Storage Device from C2 sites the menu that appears MacOSX Drag the camera volume NIKON D300 into the Trash NIKON D300 of Wireless and Ethernet Networks If the optional WT 4 wireless transmitter is attached photographs can be transferred or printed over wireless or Ethernet networks and the camera can also be controlled from network computers running Camera Control Pro 2 available separately The WT 4 can be used in any of the following modes Mode Function Upload new or existing photographs to computer or ftp server Thumbnail Preview photographs on computer monitor before select mode upload Control camera from computer using Camera Control Pro 2 available separately Print JPEG photographs on printer connected to network computer Transfer mode PC mode Print mode For more information see the WT 4 user s manual Be sure to update to the latest versions of the WT 4 firmware and supplied software M uss Select MTP PTP for the camera USB option before connecting a WT 4 wireless transmitte
157. e to create effect of a stream of light behind moving objects In programmed auto and aperture priority auto slow rear curtain sync is used to capture both subject and background Use of tripod is recommended to prevent blurring caused by camera shake 175 176 Flash Compensation Flash compensation is used to alter flash output by from 3 EV to 1EV in increments of 3EV changing the brightness of the main subject relative to the background Flash output can be increased to make the main subject appear brighter or reduced to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections Press the button and rotate the sub command dial until the desired value is displayed in the control panel In general choose positive values to make the main subject brighter negative values to make it darker 5 button Sub command dial At values other than 0 a icon will be displayed in the control panel and viewfinder after you release the button The current value for flash compensation can be confirmed by pressing the TARTI oo button 0 EV HA button Normal flash output can be restored by pressed setting flash compensation to 0 0 Flash jes esae e4 aa compensation is not reset when the camera S 0 3 EV is turned off E C 1 0 EV Optional Flash Units Flash compensation is also available with optional SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 flash units See Also For information on choosi
158. eancosssconistesavecscasenssaigeanensssensidicsines 3 The Control Panel c csessssssssessssesssscsssessssecssssesecssecesscssssesssecsneeessees 8 The Viewfinder Display sssssccsssssscssecssssecssecceseesssseessneesesaee 10 The Shooting Information Display ssssssccssssessseseeesneeseeeee 12 The Command Dials Quick Start GUIdE ee cessssssssecssesssecsscsssessnesssesssccnscessessesesecssecsssesses Tutorial 23 Camera MONUGS csscsscsssscscsssssesccsscsecsesssserscnsesccnsencceseessensessescsncanenss 24 Using Camera MENUS esssescsssscseccsseesseesssessssceesscesseeesseesnsecsseeesee 26 FAG IID ireann NaN RNA 29 First Steps uu esessessscsecsessceseees 30 Charge the Battery csecsssssccsseccssssecsssseccsssesesnseesssseccseeseenseesse 30 Insert the Battery ssssccssscccssseccsseescsseecsssseeessusecssstecesneeeesneessaeees 32 AttAaCH ia Lenssen isisisi niia 34 BASIC SCCU PD in sxccsscesseasiessavsecscssvassssexseoncessetesscasvensedaysunsesaoncssnscsvisvasateones 36 Insert a Memory Card ssesecsssssccssesscsssscssseeccsseessssseccsseceesnteessneees 39 Format the Memory Card ssssssssscsssecssstesccsseessssssecseesssntecssneeee 41 Adjust Viewfinder FOCUS ssssssssscsssscssssssecssessssnseesssesescneessneeeesee 43 Basic Photography and Playback seesssssssscssssccseecssseeceneeesees 44 Turn the Camera ON w esesessscsssesssccssseesecssssseccensssecessnssecesessnseeeesens 44 Adjust Camer
159. eb akeeh ae displayed Choose another reference object and repeat the process from step 1 vV Image Dust Off Reference Data The same reference data can be used for photographs taken with different lenses or at different apertures Reference images can not be viewed using computer imaging software A grid pattern is displayed when reference images are viewed on the camera histograms and highlights are not displayed Battery Info View information on the battery currently BB Battery info inserted in the camera Bat meter Pic meter Y oe Charging life 0 4 2 OR Done Item Description Bat meter The current battery level expressed as a percentage Pic meter The number of times the shutter has been released with the current battery since the battery was last charged Note that the camera may sometimes release the shutter without recording a photograph for example when measuring preset white balance Calibration This item is displayed only when the camera is powered by an optional MB D10 battery pack equipped with an EN EL4a or EN EL4 battery available separately e SCAL Due to repeated use and recharging calibration is required to ensure that battery level can be measured accurately recalibrate battery before charging e Calibration not required Charging life A five level display showing battery age 0 1H indicates that battery performance is unimpaired
160. ecommended T1 Select mirror up mode Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to Mup Dy Release mode dial 2 Raise the mirror n Frame the picture focus and then press Cay the shutter release button the rest of the way down to raise the mirror vV Using the Viewfinder Note that autofocus metering and framing can not be confirmed in the viewfinder while mirror is raised 3 Takea picture n Press the shutter release button all the E way down again to take a picture To prevent blurring caused by camera movement press the shutter release button smoothly or use an optional remote cord pg 369 The mirror lowers when shooting ends Mirror up Mode A picture will be taken automatically if no operations are performed for about 30 s after the mirror is raised 91 g 92 ISO Sensitivity Reacting Faster to Light ISO sensitivity is the digital equivalent of film speed The higher the ISO sensitivity the less light needed to make an exposure allowing higher shutter speeds or smaller apertures This chapter describes how to set ISO sensitivity manually and automatically Choosing ISO Sensitivity Manually s scessescssees pg 94 Auto ISO Sensitivity Control ssessssessoseososcososcsscscsscseo pg 96 93 Choosing ISO Sensitivity Manually ISO sensitivity can be set to values between ISO 2
161. ector pg 62 photographs can only be taken if the in focus indicator appears in the K A viewfinder Cover the Viewfinder In exposure modes other than manual cover the viewfinder with the supplied DK 5 eyepiece cap after focusing This prevents light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure A 89 p 90 3 Start the timer Press the shutter release button all the way down to start the timer The self timer lamp AF assist illuminator will start to blink and a beep will begin to sound Two seconds before the photograph is taken the self timer lamp will stop blinking and the beeping will become more rapid Raising the flash interrupts the timer To restart wait until the flash ready indicator is displayed in the viewfinder and press the shutter release button halfway To turn the self timer off before a photograph is taken turn the release mode dial to another setting hulk In self timer mode a shutter speed of t n amp tis equivalent to approximately 10 s See Also For information on changing the timer duration see Custom Setting c3 Self timer delay pg 280 For information on setting a beep to sound during the timer count down see Custom Setting d1 Beep pg 281 Mirror up Mode Choose this mode to minimize blurring caused by camera movement when the mirror is raised Use of a tripod is r
162. ects could cause burns Using the flash close to the subject s eyes could cause temporary visual impairment Particular care should be observed when photographing infants when the flash should be no less than one meter 39 in from the subject A Avoid contact with liquid crystal Should the monitor break care should be taken to avoid injury due to broken glass and to prevent the liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering the eyes or mouth Notices e No part of the manuals included with this product may be reproduced transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without Nikon s prior written permission e Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in these manuals at any time and without prior notice Notices for Customers in the U S A e Nikon will not be held liable for any damages resulting from the use of this product e While every effort has been made to ensure that the information in these manuals is accurate and complete we would appreciate it were you to bring any errors or omissions to the attention of the Nikon representative in your area address provided separately Federal Communications Commission FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of
163. ed both on the television screen and in the camera monitor Video Mode pg 313 Be sure that the video standard matches the standard used in the video device Note that resolution will drop when images are output on a PAL device Television Playback Use of an EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter available separately is recommended for extended playback When the EH 5a or EH 5 is connected the camera monitor off delay will be fixed at ten minutes and the exposure meters will no longer turn off automatically Note that the edges may not be visible when photographs are viewed on a television screen Slide Shows The Slide show option in the playback menu can be used for automated playback pg 252 243 244 High Definition Devices The camera can be connected to HDMI devices using a type A HDMI cable available separately from commercial sources 1 Turn the camera off Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable 2 Connect the HDMI cable as shown Connect to camera f Connect to high definition device s 7 3 Tune the device to the HDMI channel Turn the camera on and press P button During playback images will be displayed on the high definition television or monitor screen the camera monitor will remain off HDMI pg 314 At the default setting of Auto the camera automatically selects the appropriate HDMI
164. eesscieasiccdeascseennsescesiarssssshdesdbscensseacssdeaseatacsseaiiacss 102 P Programmed Auto ssssesscsssssessecsssssscssseesscessseesseensssecesssnees 104 5 Shutter Priority AUtO sss ssssssssssssssssesssseesseeessssesssseesneresssrreese 106 A Aperture Priority AUTO ssssssssssssessecsssesssccssssesessnsnsesssenss 107 M MANUAL esssssesssssssccsstescssseccsneccesuseccsssececssecessseeessueceesueeceeneeessnsees 109 Autoexposure AE LOCK cessessssssssssssssssesssccssessscsssessncsssessnccsseesneess 112 Exposure COMPENSATION ceessecnsecscssestessesseescensessecseenseeseeneesseess 114 Bracketing sivcsecssscaconvesconyetecosvvasoayescocsvvetauyvedesssvenatyeteauseveesyevteauiertaayeitbas 116 White Balance 125 White Balance Options cesssssssssssessssssseessesssssssessscssseeseesseeeseesses 126 Fine Tuning White Balance sesssssssecsssessssssesssseecssseeessnneesenssess 129 Choosing a Color Temperature sesccssssesssssesessseeecnseeecnneeessees 133 Preset MaMa ssscscssssscceiscocacacecsssvsccssascsseicnsshcsancondsacdassecsssbencsansec eateasse 134 Image Enhancement 145 Picture CONTIOIS eesssescssecsssccsseecesccsscecssccesscecsneessuccesneeessecesseeesseestes 146 Creating Custom Picture CONtIOIS sssssecssseccesseesesseceesees 154 Active D LIQhtiing ssssscsssssscsssssccssececssscecsssescesseeecsseeecunseecnssesesssecs 165 Color SpaCe seessssescsssecsseecsnsccsnscessecesseccssscessscesscceesce
165. elected for Image review in the playback menu pg 251 photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor for about 20 s the default setting after shooting 53 Deleting Unwanted Photographs To delete the photograph currently displayed in the monitor press the i button Note that photographs can not be recovered once deleted 1 Display the photograph Display the photograph you wish to delete as described in Viewing Photographs on the previous page gt button 2 Delete the photograph Press the button A confirmation dialog will be displayed i button PN 1 Delete Press the t button again to delete the image and return to playback To exit without deleting the picture press 1 Delete To delete multiple images use the Delete option in the playback menu pg 248 54 Image Recording Options This section describes how to choose image quality and size Mage Quality eee aeee nerea eaaa ASEA EE AE AEAEE pg 56 ImageSize n e e a e Eo aE E Ee pg 60 55 Image Quality The D300 supports the following image quality options Option Filetype Description RAW data from the image sensor are saved directly to the memory card in Nikon Electronic Format NEF Use with images that will be transferred to a computer for printing or processing Note that once transferred to a NEFYRAW NEF co
166. enus press the MENU button Tabs Custom Settings setup retouch and My menus see following Choose from playback shooting Eee shows position in current menu page CD brightness lean image sensor ock mirror up for cleaning Current settings are shown by 2 Menu options If 2 icon is displayed help for options in current menu current item can be viewed by pressing O n button pg 29 BE Menus The following menus are available Menu Description Playback Adjust playback settings and manage photos pg 246 Shooting Adjust shooting settings pg 254 Custom Settings Personalize camera settings pg 264 Format memory cards and perform basic camera Y Setup setup pg 311 Create retouched copies of existing photographs Ki Retouch pg 329 Create a menu of custom options pg 344 If My Menu desired a menu of recently used settings can be displayed in place of My Menu pg 348 25 Using Camera Menus HE Menu Controls The multi selector and button are used to navigate the menus Select Move cursor up highlighted item Select Cancel and return highlighted item gt z to previous menu or display sub Isny button Move cursor down Select highlighted item BE Navigating the Menus Follow the steps below to navigate the
167. epiece 43 2 DK 23 viewfinder eyepiece CUpP s sssesssssssesssessssessese 20 3 t delete button 54 222 nm format button ccsecseeeeee 41 4 gt playback button 53 204 5 MONitor sees 53 79 204 6 MENU menu button 24 245 7 Om protect button s 221 help button aise BIB info button oo eccesseesseeseee 12 8 QE thumbnail playback ZOOM out button wee 218 9 amp playback zoom in DUTTON voc ecceesseesseessessesssessseesseesees 220 10 OK DUTTON eceeessseesseeeseees 28 1 Diopter adjustment control 43 7 Focus selector lock 66 2 Metering Selector 101 8 Memory card slot cover 39 3 fet AE AF lock 9 Memory card access button oo cceeccsesssesseesseesses 68 69 306 DANN e EEE E 40 52 4 AF ON AF ON button 63 83 10 AF area mode selector 64 5 Main command dial 00 14 11 Card slot cover latch 39 6 Multi selector Rw eessessseeseeseeeee 26 The Control Panel 1 Color temperature indicator 133 2 Shutter speed ou 106 109 Exposure compensation Flash compensation value ISO SENSITIVITY es cescsseesseesseeeesees White balance fine tuning Color temperature White balance preset NUM DET iisi 143 Number of shots in exposure and flash bracketing sequence Number of shots in WB bracketing Seque
168. er Press to select the highlighted folder and return to the shooting menu to exit without changing the active folder press the MENU button Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected folder M Folder and File Numbers If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered 9999 the shutter release will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken To continue shooting create a folder with a number less than 999 or select an existing folder with a number less than 999 and less than 999 images Number of Folders Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card contains a very large number of folders 259 260 File Naming Photographs are saved using file names consisting of DSC_ or in the case of images that use the Adobe RGB color space _DSC followed by a four digit number and a three letter extension e g DSC_0001 JPG The File naming option is used to select three letters to replace the DSC portion of the file name For information on editing file names see steps 2 and 3 of Renaming Shooting Menu Banks pg 256 Note that the portion of the name that can be edited is a maximum of three characters long Extensions The following extensions are used NEF for NEF RAW images TIF for TIFF RGB images JPG for JPEG images and NDF for dust off reference data Image Quality Choose image quali
169. er This a combination of focal length and aperture can be recalled at any time by selecting the lens number using camera controls as described below BE Choosing a Lens Number Using Camera Controls 1 Assign non CPU lens number selection to a camera control Select Choose non CPU lens number as the command dials option for a camera control in the Custom Settings menu Non CPU lens number selection can be assigned to the Fn button Custom Setting f4 Assign FUNC button pg 302 the depth of field preview button Custom Setting f5 Assign preview button pg 305 or the AE L AF L button Custom Setting f6 Assign AE L AF L button pg 306 198 Use the selected control to choose a lens number Press the selected button and rotate the main command dial until the desired lens number is displayed in the control panel Focal Maximum length aperture e Lens number Main command dial Using a GPS Unit A GPS unit can be connected to the ten pin remote terminal allowing the current latitude longitude altitude Coordinated Universal Time UTC and heading to be recorded with each photograph taken The camera can be used with an optional GP 1 GPS unit see below note that the GP 1 does not provide the compass heading or with third party units connected via an optional MC 35 GPS adapter cord pg 200 BE The GP 1 GPS Unit The GP 1 is an optional GPS unit designed for use with Nik
170. erval timer photography is activated before the first exposure is taken the camera will record exposures at the selected interval until the number of exposures specified in the multiple exposure menu have been taken the number of shots listed in the interval timer shooting menu is ignored These exposures will then be recorded as a single photograph and multiple exposure mode and interval timer shooting will end Cancelling multiple exposure cancels interval timer shooting Other Settings While multiple exposure mode is in effect memory cards can not be formatted and the following can not be changed bracketing and shooting menu options other than White balance and Interval timer shooting note that Interval timer shooting can only be adjusted before the first exposure is taken The Lock mirror up for cleaning and Dust off ref photo options in the setup menu can not be used 187 188 BE nterrupting Multiple Exposures Selecting Multiple exposure inthe shooting pummm menu while a multiple exposure is being recorded displays the options shown at right To interrupt a multiple exposure before the specified number of exposures have been taken highlight Cancel and press If shooting ends before the specified number of exposures have been taken a multiple exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to that point If Auto gain is on gain will be adjusted to reflect the number of exposures actu
171. es to modify and print the current order pg 236 DPOF date and data imprint options are not supported when printing via direct USB connection to print the date of recording on photographs in the current print order use the PictBridge Time stamp option The Print Set option can not be used if there is not enough space on the memory card to store the print order Images created at image quality settings of NEF RAW pg 56 can not be selected for printing using this option Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a computer or other device after the print order is created 241 242 Viewing Photographs on TV The supplied EG D100 video cable can be used to connect the D300 to a television or VCR for playback or recording A type A High Definition Multimedia Interface HDMI cable available separately from commercial sources can be used to connect the camera to high definition video devices Standard Definition Devices To connect the camera to a standard television 1 Turn the camera off Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting the video cable 2 Connect the supplied video cable as shown Connect to camera eee A Connect to video device 3 Tune the television to the video channel Turn the camera on and press P gt button During playback images will be display
172. ettings for group B Choose the flash control mode and output level for the flash units in group B Flash entrl for built in flash Commander mode F Built in flash Group B Mode uy ie Group A ca ri c Channel Move Set WOK 4 Select the channel Flash entri for built in flash Commander mode W Built in flash Group B Channel Mod ie Group A ca E Move Set COK 5 Press 6 Compose the shot Compose the shot and arrange the flash units as shown below Note that the maximum distance at which the remote flash units can be placed may vary with shooting conditions Wireless remote 60 or less 5 m 15 ft or sensors on flash 10 m 33 ft A or less lage units should face or less S camera OBE a Camera Q 3a built in flash 30 or less A 5 m 15 ft or a less 60 or less 7 Set the remote flash units to the selected channel Turn all the remote flash units on and set them to the channel selected in Step 4 See the Speedlight instruction manuals for details 8 Raise the built in flash Press the flash pop up button to raise the built in flash Note that even if is selected for Built in flash gt Mode the built in flash must be raised so that monitor preflashes will be emitted 9 Frame the photograph focus and shoot After confirming that the camera flash ready light and the flash ready lights for all other flash units ar
173. exposure mode b Subject too bright ji R optional ND 367 Hi photo will be oe overexposed 5 Increase shutter 106 speed A Choose a smaller 107 aperture larger f number 392 Indicator Control View panel finder Problem Solution Page Use a higher ISO 94 sensitivity In exposure mode Subject too dark photo Use flash 171 Sa will be underexposed Lower shutter 106 speed A Choose a larger 107 aperture smaller f number bulb bu kh selected in e aes eee blinks exposure mode 5 exposure mode Optional flash unit that Change flash mode 4 does not support TTL etting on optional 361 blinks flash control attached 9 P blinks and set to TTL flash unit 393 394 Indicator Control View panel finder Problem Solution Page 5 If indicator blinks for 3s ee m after flash fires photo t 172 blinks underexposed adjust may be underexposed settings and try again Memory insufficient to Reduce quality or 36 60 Fuil pup record further photos SIze blinks blinks at current settings or e Delete photographs 248 camera has run out of insert new memory 39 file or folder numbers card Release shutter If error E persists or appears biak Camera malfunction frequently consult Nikon authorized service representative Indicator Control Monitor panel Problem Solut
174. f automatically Illuminator may become hot with continued use wait for lamp to cool down Photos are blotched or e Clean lens smeared Clean low pass filter 373 e Adjust white balance to match 126 light source Colors are unnatural Adjust Set Picture Control 146 settings Camnotimeasure waits Subject is too dark or too bright 137 balance Image can not be selected as source for preset white Image was not created with D300 140 balance NEF RAW or NEF JPEG image 56 ality option selected for ima White balance bracketing ne pions ect ee tonimage unavailable Raided i e Multiple exposure mode is in 187 effect Problem Solution Page A auto is selected for sharpening Effects of Picture Control contrast or saturation For differ from image to consistent results over a series of 152 image photographs choose a setting other than A auto Metering can not be as g Autoexposure lock is in effect 112 changed Fxposure compensation Choose exposure mode P 5 or A 114 can not be used Reddish areas may appear in long A ime exposures Turn lon Reddish areas appear in MER 9 exposure noise reduction on when 262 photos shooting at shutter speeds of ia k i Only one shot taken each time shutter release button is pressed in Lower built in flash 173 continuous shooting mode 387 388 BE Playback Problem Solution Page Flash
175. fila Keh BA Selected pictures are marked by an icon When selecting pictures for printing press the Om button and press A or V to choose the number of copies 247 248 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select additional pictures To deselect a picture highlight it and press center of multi selector 4 Press to complete the operation button A confirmation dialog will be displayed mm highlight Yes and press Delete Delete 3 images Select this option to delete pictures Protected and hidden images will not be deleted Option Description i Selected Delete selected pictures All Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for playback pg 249 Playback Folder Choose a folder for playback Option Description ND300 Pictures in all folders created with the D300 will be default visible during playback All Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback Only pictures in the current folder will be visible Current during playback Hide Image Hide or reveal selected pictures Hidden pictures are visible only in the Hide image menu and can only be deleted by formatting the memory card Option Description Select set Hide or reveal selected pictures Deselect all Reveal all pictures 7 Protected and Hidden Images Revealing a protected image will also remove protection from t
176. for the specified period long normal or default short before adjusting the distance to the subject This prevents the camera from refocusing when the subject is briefly obscured by objects passing through the frame The camera immediately adjusts focus when the distance Off to the subject changes Use when photographing a series of subjects at varying distances in quick succession li AFE Short 270 a5 AF Activation This option controls whether both the shutter release button and the AF ON button can be used to initiate autofocus or whether autofocus is only initiated when the AF ON button is pressed Option Description a Autofocus can be performed with the AF ON button or by default pressing the shutter release button halfway AF ON only Autofocus can only be performed using the AF 0N button a6 AF Point Illumination Choose whether the active focus point is highlighted in red in the viewfinder Option Description Auto The selected focus point is automatically highlighted as default needed to establish contrast with the background The selected focus point is always highlighted regardless of the brightness of the background Depending on the brightness of the background the selected focus point may be difficult to see Off The selected focus point is not highlighted On 271 a7 Focu s Point Wrap Around Choose whether focus point selection
177. fway and check shutter speed and aperture The settings available when the built in flash is raised are listed below Mode Shutter speed Aperture See page p Set automatically by camera f 1 1 12 h 104 1 250 s 60 s Set automatically 5 Value selected by user by camera 106 1 250 s 30 s 2 Set automatically by camera 1 250 s 60 s 12 Value selected Value selected by user by user 1 250 s 30 s 2 1 Shutter speed may be set as slow as 30s in slow sync slow rear curtain sync and slow sync with red eye reduction flash modes 2 Speeds as fast as s 000 s are available with optional SB 900 SB 800 and SB 600 flash units when 1 320 s Auto FP or 1 250 s Auto FP is selected for Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed pg 288 3 Flash range varies with aperture and ISO sensitivity Consult table of flash ranges pg 408 when setting aperture in A and M modes A 107 M 109 At default settings the effects of the flash can be previewed by pressing the depth of field preview button to emit a modeling preflash pg 297 Take the picture Compose the photograph focus and shoot If the flash ready indicator 4 blinks for about three seconds after the photograph is taken the flash has fired at full output and the photograph may be underexposed Check the results in the monitor If the photograph is underexposed adjust settings and try again See Also See page 289 for information on
178. ge contains objects with a wide range of brightnesses the distribution of tones will be relatively even If the image is dark tone distribution will be shifted to the left If the image is bright tone distribution will be shifted to the right nage Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the right while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the left Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see photographs in the monitor Histograms Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from those displayed in imaging applications 210 EE Shooting Data Page 1 MTR SPD AP do ONN F4 8 p EXP MODE 1SO_ j 18 200 3 5 5 6 S VR i AF VR S VR On FLASH MODE Built e TTL 1 3 2 S _ fee 3 T i 4 5 EA EXP TUNING 1 3 O56 6 FOCAL LENGTH lt 35mm 8 9 10 NIKON D300 1 Protect Status cesses 221 2 Retouch indicator 329 3 Metering method 100 Shutter speed ou 106 109 Aperture ou ceccescssscssssesenenee 107 109 A Exposure MOE sss 102 ISO sensitivity 7 cesses 94 5 Exposure compensation 114 Optimal exposure tuning 277 6 Focal length eesssssssesessesssees 356 7 Lens data nn esessccssseesscssseeeseeene 196 4 CMD M TTL 3 0 TTL 43 0 B OFF 8 FOCUS Mode uueesesesessssesssessssssessseeeee 62 Lens VR
179. gs saved using the D300 can be restored by selecting Load settings Note that Save load settings is only available when a memory card is inserted in the camera and that the Load settings option is only available if the card contains saved settings Saved Settings Settings are saved in a file named NCSETUP1 The camera will not be able to load settings if the file name is changed GPS Adjust settings for connection to a GPS unit pg 202 Non CPU Lens Data By specifying lens data lens focal length and maximum aperture for up to nine non CPU lenses the user can gain access to a variety of CPU lens functions pg 196 AF Fine Tune Fine tune focus for up to 12 lens types AF tuning is not recommended in most situations use only when required Option Description AF fine tune On Turn AF tuning on On Off default Turn AF tuning off Off Tune AF for the current lens CPU Move focal lenses only Press A or V tochoose point away Current Saved a value between 20 and 20 from camera value AF fine tun stored Only one value can be stored for each type of lens Saved value 18 200ae F3 5 5 6 VR value Values for up to 12 lens types can be Y No 2 Choose the AF tuning value used when no previously saved value exists for the current lens CPU Move focal Previous lenses only point toward value camera Default 327 328 Option Description
180. h Photography E Other Shooting Options E More About Playback Connections Menu Guide Technical Notes Q amp A Index Find what you re looking for using this question and answer index HE New Features Question Key phrase See page How do take high quality NEF RAW 14 bit NEF RAW 59 photos Can use the monitor as a viewfinder Live view 79 Can control how photos are processed Picture Controls 146 How do preserve details in shadows and ty highlights Active D Lighting 165 How do focus on erratically moving 3D tracking 270 subjects Can adjust focus separately for different AF fine tune 327 lenses How do I remove dust from the low pass Cleaning the low pass 373 filter protecting the image sensor filter EE Camera Setup Question Key phrase See page How do I focus the viewfinder Viewfinder focus 43 mn do I keep the monitor from turning Monitor off delay 280 How do I keep the shutter speed and Auto met roff 46 279 aperture displays from turning off Question Key phrase See page How do set the clock How do set the clock for daylight savings time World time 37 315 How do change time zones when travel How do adjust monitor brightness for LCD brightness 312 menus or playback How do I restore default settings Two button reset 182 How do I restore shooting menu Reset shoot
181. h no effect on image quality NEF images are compressed using a non ON Compressed reversible algorithm reducing file size by about 40 55 with almost no effect on image quality Uncompressed NEF images are not compressed 58 BE The NEF RAW Recording Menu NEF RAW Bit Depth The NEF RAW recording gt NEF RAW bit depth item in the shooting menu offers the following bit depth options for NEF RAW images Option Description 12 bit P 12 bit default NEF RAW images are recorded at a bit depth of 12 bits NEF RAW images are recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits producing files roughly 1 3 times larger than 12 bit files but increasing the color data recorded Maximum frame advance rate pg 77 falls to 2 5 fps bit 14 bit NEF RAW Images Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of NEF RAW images When opened in ViewNxX version 1 2 0 or later or other compatible software such as Capture NX version 1 3 5 or later or Capture NX 2 version 2 1 0 or later available separately NEF RAW images have the dimensions given for large L size images 59 Image Size Image size is measured in pixels Choose from the following options Option Size pixels Size when printed at 200 dpi approx L default 4 288 x 2 848 54 5 x 36 2 cm 21 4 x 14 2 in M 3 216 x 2 136 40 8 x 27 1 cm 16 1 x 10 7 in S 2 144 x 1 424 27 2 x 18 1 cm 10 7 x 7 1 in
182. h speed 3 Press the shutter release button all the way down The mirror will be raised and the view through the lens will be displayed in the camera m Pies 56 2005497 monitor instead of the viewfinder for improved focus focus on your subject by pressing the shutter release button halfway then press it the rest of the way down to start live view To exit without taking a picture rotate the release mode dial to another setting or press MENU 4 Framea picture in the monitor To magnify the view in the monitor up to 3 x press the amp button Q button While the view through the lens is zoomed in a navigation window will appear in the bottom right corner of the display Use the multi selector to scroll within the AF area brackets 5 Focus Autofocus focus mode S or C Press the shutter release button halfway or press the AF ON button The camera will focus normally and set exposure Note that the mirror will click back into place while either button is pressed temporarily interrupting live view Live view is restored when the button is released Manual focus focus mode M pg 71 Focus using the lens focusing ring 81 m 82 6 Take the picture 4 Press the shutter release button the rest oN of the way down to reset focus and exposure and take the picture If continuous high speed or continuous low speed is sele
183. he cord on this product may expose you to lead a chemical known to the State of California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm Wash hands after handling Nikon Inc 1300 Walt Whitman Road Melville New York 11747 3064 U S A Tel 631 547 4200 Notices for Customers in Canada CAUTION This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Notices for Customers in Europe This symbol indicates that this product is to be collected separately The following apply only to users in European countries e This product is designated for separate collection at an appropriate collection point Do not dispose of as household waste For more information contact the retailer or the local authorities in charge of waste management Disposing of Data Storage Devices ATTENTION Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada This symbol on the battery indicates that the battery is to be collected separately The following apply only to users in European countries All batteries whether marked with this symbol or not are designated for separate collection at an appropriate collection point Do not dispose of as household waste For more information contact the retailer or the local authorities in charge of waste management Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage devices does not completely erase the original image dat
184. he image 249 250 Display Mode Choose the information available in the playback photo information display pg 206 Press A or W to highlight an E C Focus point option then press to select the option for Parov the photo information display A Y appears next to selected items to deselect highlight O RGB histogram O Data 2 and press To return to the playback menu highlight Done and press gt Option Description Basic photo info Focus point Active focus point or in single servo AF focus point where focus first locked is shown in red in photo information display No focus point is displayed if camera was unable to focus using continuous servo autofocus or if continuous servo autofocus was used with auto area AF o etailed photo info Highlights Highlights for master RGB channel and for individual red green and blue channels are shown in photo information display Very bright areas blink on and off RGB Red green and blue histograms are displayed in photo histogram information display Shooting data pages including camera name Data metering exposure focal length white balance and image options appear in photo information display Image Review Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the monitor immediately after shooting Option Description On Pictures are automatically displayed in the monitor after
185. hlight the destination preset d 1 to d 4 and press the center of the multi selector 3 Choose Select image E White balance E Preset manual Highlight Select image and E press gt i Edit comment Copy H0 4 Highlight a source image Highlight the source image To view the highlighted image full frame press the amp button 5 Copy white balance Press the center of the multi selector to copy the white balance value for the al highlighted photograph to the selected preset If the highlighted photograph has a comment pg 316 the comment will be copied to the comment for the selected preset Choosing a White Balance Preset Press A to highlight the current white balance E White balance preset d 0 d 4 and press gt to select another E Preset manual preset tb Change Set Edit comment Select image Copy 0 ta 141 142 EE Selecting a White Balance Preset To set white balance to a preset value 1 Select PRE Preset manual Highlight Preset manual in the white balance menu pg 126 and press gt White balance _ Incandescent Fluorescent W Direct sunlight Flash Cloudy Shade ia Choose color temp CG a Y M 2 Selecta preset Highlight the desired preset and press the center of the multi selector To select the highlighted preset and display fine tuning menu pg 130 without completing the next step press instead of pressing
186. hting 0 eessssecsssessccsecsesecesssecessneesesnees 261 Long Exp NR Long Exposure Noise Reduction 262 High ISO NR isisisi 263 ISO Sensitivity Settings eeceessseccssecssescseecnecsseecseceneeessees 263 Live VIEW aenar iaat 263 Multiple EXpOSUre cssscsssssscsssscssssseccssesccsnsscsssseeessnecessneeeesnses 263 Interval Timer SHOOTING ssssssccssecesseseccsseecesseeseesseeessneeeseee 263 Custom Settings Fine Tuning Camera Settings 264 CUSTOM Setting Bak ceessccsssscesseecesseesccstecsssesecesseesssneeeeee Reset CUSTOM Settings seeccssscseccssecsseecssescsseecsecesseeeseeessees ai AUTOFOCUS sasscecscssassaccsnusscesosassssectiusseosgesatscssionisessfessivatoesneszenetaaaie a1 AF C Priority Selection a2 AF S Priority Selection xiv 3 Dynamic AF Area siiani 269 a4 Focus Tracking with Lock On ssssssssssssssrsssssssreesssssreee 270 ADTAPF ACIVATION sissassncccdssscassusccnessoconssdvonnscendenssansonascadsssneoosontasd 271 a6 AF Point Illumination 271 a7 Focus Point Wrap Around 272 a8 AF Point Selection 00 272 a9 Built in AF assist INUMINAtOM eeecsssessccseecesseeceeseees 273 a10 AF On for MB D10 ssssscsssseccssesccssteccssseeesnsecesseeeesnsees 274 MeterinG EXPOSULC eesssssssssecsssssecsssessssssecsssssessssecsssseeesssees 275 b1 ISO Sensitivity Step Value uu ecssecsssesccssteccsseeseesseesenees 275 b2 EV Steps for Exposur
187. i 230 Direct USB Connection sssssssssssseessssesererssssererssssereernserrenssereeenssee 231 Viewing Photographs on TV sssssssssssssssssssssssessssssesssssssesssssesessssssre 242 Standard Definition Devices sss sssssessssssesssesssressesresssresseseesseees 242 High Definition Devices ssssssssscsssseccsseecesssecssseesssntecssnseesees 244 xiii Menu Guide 245 gt The Playback Menu Managing IMages sssscccsssccsssseees 246 DLC E EEE E 248 Playback Folder 249 Hide Image 249 Display Mode 250 Image ROVIOW sisrscssssccsenssczccsatassssnsssasecssitandsonsstasssdosndsvansstucsansins 251 After Delete siccscssssnssseassoussesocsnasseestonsvoessesnisearcnsninsisetnssscospesnsiacte 251 ROTA Tall saisssesssssosssnnsssscannassoonsnosaisernondessnestassessccansesnsebasseenctansss 251 Slide SHOW senenin 252 Print Set DPOF Jennerien nena 253 i The Shooting Menu Shooting Options sce 254 Shooting Menu Bank Reset Shooting Menu Active Folder x FIENIMING cernninaceninnnnarenanani nnani Image Quality sassen Image Size sanninna issi tess JPEG COMPreSSiON ssssssssssisccsssssssssusssssonissssesesrsssonnssssasosossssssase NEF RAW Recording 261 White Balance 261 Set Picture Control 261 Manage Picture Contrl sssscssssecsssessecsssesssseccsseeessneecssnees 261 Color Spa Cee sescsosss aasesscacssisasthbnssscsenesstocigentavcachossecnuatcrsuieavies 261 Active D Lig
188. iewfinder pg 80 Camera focuses normally using phase detection autofocus Tripod 5 Choose when the camera is mounted on a tripod pg 83 You can zoom in on the image displayed in the monitor for precise focus making this option suitable for static subjects Contrast detect autofocus can be used to compose photographs with the subject positioned anywhere in the frame Phase Detection Versus Contrast Detect AF The camera normally uses phase detection autofocus in which focus is adjusted based on data from a special focusing sensor When Tripod is selected in live view however the camera uses contrast detect autofocus in which the camera analyses the data from the image sensor and adjusts focus to produce the greatest contrast Contrast detect autofocus takes longer than phase detection autofocus 79 p 80 Hand Held Mode A 1 Select live view mode Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to Ly Release mode dial 2 Adjust Live view options in the shooting menu Select Live view inthe shooting menu IEE and choose Hand held for Live view ic Live view mode mode MET hane G E amp Tripod The Live view menu also contains a B Live view Release mode option where you can Bisnis choose from single frame and VTE Sinse frame OR continuous release modes pg 74 Continuous low speed Cu Continuous hig
189. ill be displayed adjacent to the altered settings in the second level of the Custom Settings menu Reset Custom Settings Choose whether to restore default settings for the current Custom Settings bank See page 402 for a list of default settings Custom Settings are not reset when a two button reset is performed Option Description Yes Restore defaults for the current Custom Settings bank No default Exit without changing Custom Settings a Autofocus a1 AF C Priority Selection This option controls whether Focus mode selector photographs can be taken whenever the shutter release button is pressed release priority or only when the camera is in focus focus priority in continuous servo AF To select continuous servo AF rotate the focus mode selector to C Option Description Release Photos can be taken whenever the shutter release default button is pressed Photos can be taken even when the camera is not in Release ga focus In continuous mode frame rate slows for focus aie improved focus if the subject is dark or low contrast S Photos can only be taken when the in focus indicator Es Focus is displayed Regardless of the option selected focus will not lock when the in focus indicator is displayed 267 268 a2 AF S Priority Selection This option controls whether Focus mode selector photographs can be taken only when the came
190. imer 89 189 Trim 336 Two button reset 182 U USB 225 318 Mass Storage 225 MTP PTP 225 318 USB 224 225 232 318 cable i 226 228 232 UTC 37 202 215 v Video 88 242 313 cable i 242 mode 313 Video mode 313 Viewfinder 10 20 43 89 410 eyepiece 20 87 89 191 eyepiece cap 89 191 focus 43 71 Viewfinder grid display 281 Viewfinder warning display 282 ViewNX 56 147 168 230 w WB 121 126 White balance 126 Auto 126 Choose color temp 127 133 Cloudy 127 Direct sunlight 126 Flash 127 Fluorescent 126 Incandescent 126 Preset manual 127 134 Shade 127 White balance 121 126 bracketing 121 preset manual 127 134 Wireless 229 365 network 229 365 transmitter 229 365 Wireless transmitter 229 World time 37 315 Date and time 37 315 Date format 38 315 Daylight saving time 37 315 Time zone 37 315 WT 4 229 365 425 Nikon No reproduction in any form of this manual in whole or in part except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews may be made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION NIKON CORPORATION Fuji Bldg 2 3 Marunouchi 3 chome Chiyoda ku Tokyo 100 8331 Japan Printed in Europe SB8K04 11 2007 Nikon Corporation 6MB00211 04
191. information See Also For information on choosing the role played by the center of the multi selector see Custom Setting f1 Multi selector center button pg 300 219 Taking a Closer Look Playback Zoom Press the amp button to zoom in on the image displayed in full frame playback or on the image currently highlighted in thumbnail playback The following operations can be performed while zoom is in effect To Use Description Press amp to zoom in to maximum of approximately Zoom in or Q QE 27 x large out images 20 x medium images or 13 x small images Press 9 to zoom out While photo is zoomed in use multi selector to view areas of image not visible in monitor View other Keep multi selector pressed to scroll oleae of rapidly to other areas of frame Navigation image window is displayed when zoom ratio is altered area currently visible in monitor is indicated by yellow border a View other Rotate main command dial to view same location in other images at current zoom Images rA ratio Change protect Om See page 221 for more information status Return to s Monitor will turn off Photographs can be shooting P i taken immediately mode Display MENU See page 245 for more information menus 220 Protecting Photographs from Deletion In full frame zoom and thumbnail playback the O n button can be
192. ing 230 Programmed auto 104 Protecting photographs 221 R Rear curtain sync 175 Red eye correction 335 Red eye reduction 174 Release button to use dial 308 Release mode 73 continuous 74 76 high speed 74 76 low speed 74 76 282 dial 75 lock release 75 live view 79 mirror up 91 self timer 89 single frame 74 Remote cord 86 91 369 Reset 182 257 266 400 Reset custom settings 266 Reset shooting menu 257 Reverse indicators 310 RGB 56 167 209 RGB Histogram 209 Rotate tall 251 423 Menu items and options in the camera monitor are shown in brackets sS S 60 Save load settings 325 Saving camera settings 325 Self timer delay 280 Sensitivity 93 94 96 Set Picture Control 148 Monochrome 148 Filter effects 151 153 Toning 151 153 Neutral 148 Standard 148 Vivid 148 Setup menu 311 Shooting data 211 212 213 Shooting info display 284 Shooting info display 12 284 Shooting menu 254 Shooting menu bank 255 Shutter priority auto 106 Shutter release button 51 52 68 112 279 half press 51 52 68 112 Shutter release button AE L 279 Side by side comparison 342 Single point AF 64 65 Size 60 Slide show 252 Frame interval 252 Slide show 252 Slow sync 174 Speedlight 357 Spot 100 278 T Television 242 313 314 Ten pin remote terminal 199 369 Thumbnail 218 TIFF RGB 56 Time 37 315 Time exposure 111 T
193. ing Gd At default settings the displays will flash Control panel for about six seconds V 7 i Viewfinder 137 138 If lighting is too dark or too bright the camera may be unable to measure white balance A flashing na id will appear in the control panel and viewfinder at default settings the displays will flash for Control panel about six seconds Press the shutter il release button halfway to return to no id PrE Step 4 and measure white balance again 1 Viewfinder 6 Select preset d 0 If the new value for preset white balance will be used immediately select preset d 0 by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub command dial until d 0 is displayed in the control panel M Direct Measurement Mode If no operations are performed while the displays are flashing direct measurement mode will end in the time selected for Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay pg 279 The default setting is six seconds Preset d 0 The new value for white balance will be stored in preset d 0 automatically replacing the previous value for this preset no confirmation dialog will be displayed A thumbnail will be displayed in the preset white balance list ih Sellet set To use the new value for white balance select preset d 0 if no value has been measured for white balance before d 0 is selected white balance will be set to a color temperature of 5 200 K the same as Direct sunlight The
194. ing areas appear in images Sh stinadata aope Press A or W to choose photo oting PP information displayed or change 206 250 on images i settings for Display mode A graph appears during playback NEF RAW imageis Photo was taken at image quality of NEF 57 not played back JPEG Some photos are not displayed during Select All for Playback folder 249 playback Select On for Rotate tall 251 var Photo was taken with Off selected 317 Tall portrait for Auto image rotation orientation photos s Camera orientation was changed 77 are displayed in hile sh b wide landscape while utter re ease ee was hentatien pressed in continuous release mode Camera was pointed up or down 317 when photo was taken Can not delete photo Photo is protected remove protection 221 Message is displayed stating that no Select AIl for Playback folder 249 images are available for playback Caninotchange print Memory card is full delete photos 45 248 order Photo is in NEF RAW format Transfer to computer and print using ViewNX Can not select photo version 1 2 0 or later or Capture NX 230 for printing version 1 3 5 or later or Capture NX 2 version 2 1 0 or later Problem Solution Page Set USB to MTP PTP 318 NEF RAW and TIFF photos can not be 230 printed by direct USB connection Use Can not print photos DPOF print service TIFF images onl
195. ing menu 257 defaults How do I restore Custom Setting Reset custom settings 266 defaults How do I change the self timer delay Self timer delay 280 How do I turn the speaker off Beep 281 Can reverse the electronic analog Reyers indi at rs 310 exposure display Can I display the menus in a different anauade 315 language Can I save menu settings for use ona different D300 camera Save load settings 325 EE Menus and Displays Question Key phrase See page How do I get more information on a Help 29 menu How do I use the menus Using the menus 24 What do these indicators mean Viewfinder control What information is in the shooting panel shooting 8 10 12 information display information display What does this warning mean Ener messagesand 391 displays How much charge does the battery have Battery level 44 left vi Question Key phrase See page How do get more information about the Battery info 321 battery How do I keep the file number from bei t when i t ae reset when I insert a new memory Eile number saguence 283 How do I reset file numbering to 1 How do I clean the camera or lens Cleaning the camera 372 HE Taking Photographs Question Key phrase See page How many more shots can take with this Number of exposures 45 card remaining How do take bigger photographs How can get more photos on the Image quality and size 56 60 memory card
196. ion Ba Clean imase sensor Clean at startup shutdown Highlight one of the following Y GON Clean at startup options and press F SAF Clean at shutdown St Clean at startup amp shutdown EM Cleaning off n E Option Description a The image sensor is automatically cleaned 0N Clean at startup ag y each time the camera is turned on The image sensor is automatically cleaned Clean at F during shutdown each time the camera is shutdown turned off on Clean at startup The image sensor is cleaned automatically at amp shutdown startup and at shutdown Cleaning off S Automatic image sensor cleaning off default 9 g m Image Sensor Cleaning The following interrupt image sensor cleaning raising the built in flash pressing the shutter release depth of field preview or AF ON button or using FV lock Cleaning is performed by vibrating the image sensor If dust can not be fully removed using the options in the Clean image sensor menu clean the image sensor manually pg 376 or consult a Nikon authorized service f representative If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession image sensor cleaning may be temporarily disabled to protect the camera s internal circuitry Cleaning can be performed again after a short wait 375 BE Manual Cleaning If foreign matter can not be removed from the low pass filter using the Clean image sensor pg 373 option in the setu
197. ion See Custom Setting f3 Photo info playback pg 301 for details 205 Photo Information Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full frame playback There are up to 9 pages of information for each photo Press A or W to cycle through photo information as shown below Note that shooting data RGB histograms and highlights are only displayed if corresponding option is selected for Display mode pg 250 shooting data page 4 is only displayed if copyright information was recorded with the photograph as described on page 324 GPS data are only displayed if a GPS device was used when the photo was taken LATITUDE LONGITUDE LS ALTITUDE P 1125 F5 6 9200 35mm TIME UTC HEADING BAUTO 0 0 se SSD 100ND300 __ DSC 0001 JPG NORMAL 100ND300 _ DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 15 12 2007_10 1 4288x2848 15 12 2007 10 15 29 4288x2848 File information Overview data GPS data ARTIST NIKON TARO COPYRIGHT NIKON RGB histogram Shooting data pages 1 3 Shooting data page 4 206 HE File Information 1 Protect Status esses 221 7 Image quality 0 eeessssseeseeeeee 56 2 Retouch indicator 329 8 IMAGE S Ze ssssssssssssresssssssreesssssreeee 60 3 Focus point 9 Image authentication 323 4 AF area brackets 10 Time of recording 37 5 Frame number 11 Date of recording esses 37 total number of frames 12 Folder name 258 6 File NAME esesceesseesseesseeseessees 260
198. ion Page No memor Camera cannot Turn camera off and Y E detect memory confirm that card is 39 card card correctly inserted e Error accessing e Use Nikon 371 This memory memory card approved card card cannot e Check that contacts be used are clean If card is EHA Card may be blink damaged contact damaged blinks retailer or Nikon Insert representative another card Unable to create Delete files or insert 39 248 new folder new memory card 395 396 Indicator Control Monitor panel Problem Solution Page ane not F Memory cardhas Format memory card ovens the blinks not been formatted orinsertnewmemory 39 41 for use in camera card card Select folder Folder No images on containing images A memory card orin from Playback folder contains no 39 249 imate folder s selected menu or insert ges for playback different memory card No images can be played back until All photos in another folder has All images are P been selected or current folder are A 249 hidden hidden Hide image used to i allow at least one image to be displayed File has been created or File does not modified using a containimage computer or File can not be played data different make of camera or file is corrupt back on camera Indicator Control Monitor panel Problem Solution Page Memory card does Image
199. ire Do not look at the sun through the viewfinder Viewing the sun or other strong light source through the viewfinder could cause permanent visual impairment Using the viewfinder diopter control When operating the viewfinder diopter control with your eye to the viewfinder care should be taken not to put your finger in your eye accidentally malfunction Should you notice smoke or an unusual smell coming from the equipment or AC adapter available separately unplug the AC adapter and remove the battery immediately taking care to avoid burns Continued operation could result in injury After removing the battery take the equipment to a Nikon authorized service center for inspection Do not disassemble Touching the product s internal parts could result in injury In the event of malfunction the product should be repaired only by a qualified technician Should the product break open as the result of a fall or other accident remove the battery and or AC adapter and then take the product to a Nikon authorized service center for inspection A Do not use in the presence of flammable gas Do not use electronic equipment in the presence of flammable gas as this could result in explosion or fire Keep out of reach of children Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury Do not place the strap around the neck of an infant or child Placing the camera strap around the neck of an infant or child
200. isconnect the power source during formatting or while data are being recorded deleted or copied to a computer Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to the camera or card Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects Do not bend drop or subject to strong physical shocks Do not apply force to the card casing Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card e Do not expose to water high levels of humidity or direct sunlight No Memory Card If no memory card is inserted the control panel and viewfinder will show If the camera is turned off with a charged EN EL3e battery and no memory card inserted E will be displayed in the control panel PS Sb n 2 I Adjust Viewfinder Focus The camera is equipped with diopter adjustment to accommodate individual differences in vision Check that the display in the viewfinder is in focus before shooting 1 Turn the camera on Power switch iim Remove the lens cap and turn the camera on 2 Focus the viewfinder Rotate the diopter control until the viewfinder display focus points and AF area brackets are in sharp focus When operating the diopter control with your eye to the viewfinder be careful not to put your fingers or fingernails in your eye Adjusting Viewfinder Focus If you are unable to focus the viewfinder as described ab
201. ive focal length of a 24mm lens in 35mm format would be 36 mm when mounted on the D300 Picture size 35mm format 36 x 24 mm Picture diagonal Picture size D300 23 6 x 15 8 mm Picture angle 35mm format Picture angle D300 Optional Flash Units Speedlights The D300 can be used with CLS compatible flash units The Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS Nikon s advanced Creative Lighting System CLS offers improved communication between the camera and compatible flash units for improved flash photography The Creative Lighting System supports the following features e i TTL flash control Improved through the lens TTL flash control for use with CLS see page 170 Flash level is set using monitor pre flashes to measure the light reflected by the subject ensuring that the level is adjusted appropriately for ambient lighting e Advanced Wireless Lighting Allows i TTL flash control with remote wireless flash units e FVlock pg 178 Locks flash level at the metered value allowing a series of photographs to be taken at the same flash level e Auto FP High Speed Sync pg 289 Allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter speed supported by the camera making it possible to choose the maximum aperture for reduced depth of field 357 BE CLS Compatible Flash Units The D300 can be used with the following CLS compatible flash units the SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB R200 and
202. ix metering 0 Center weighted 0 Spot metering 0 c1 Shutter release button AE L pg 279 Off c2 Auto meter off delay pg 279 65 c3 Self timer delay pg 280 10s c4 Monitor off delay pg 280 20s Only the settings in the bank currently selected using the Custom settings bank option will be reset pg 266 Settings in all other banks are unaffected Option Default d1 Beep pg 281 High d2 Viewfinder grid display pg 281 Off d3 Viewfinder warning display pg 282 On d4 CL mode shooting speed pg 282 3 fps d5 Max continuous release pg 282 100 d6 File number sequence pg 283 On d7 Shooting info display pg 284 Auto d8 LCD illumination pg 285 Off d9 Exposure delay mode pg 285 Off d10 MB D10 battery type pg 285 LR6 AA alkaline d11 Battery order pg 287 Use MB D10 batteries first e1 Flash sync speed pg 288 1 250 s e2 Flash shutter speed pg 290 1 60 s e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash pg 291 TTL e4 Modeling flash pg 297 On e5 Auto bracketing set pg 297 AE amp flash e6 Auto bracketing Mode M pg 298 Flash speed e7 Bracketing order pg 299 MTR gt under gt over 403 Option Default fl Multi selector center button pg 300 Shooting mode Select center focus point Playback mode
203. justing how long the camera waits before refocusing when an object moves in front of the camera see Custom Setting a4 Focus tracking with lock on pg 270 65 lt gt 66 Focus Point Selection The D300 offers a choice of 51 focus points that together cover a wide area of the frame The focus point can be selected manually allowing photographs to be composed with the main subject positioned almost anywhere in the frame single point and dynamic AF area mode selector area AF or automatically auto area AF note that manual focus point detection is not available when auto area AF is selected To select the focus point manually 1 Rotate the focus selector lock to This allows the multi selector to be used to select the focus point 2 Select the focus point Use the multi selector to select the focus point At default settings the center focus point can be selected by pressing the center of the multi selector The focus selector lock can be rotated to the locked L position following selection to prevent the selected focus point from changing when the multi selector is pressed See Also For information on choosing when the focus point is illuminated see Custom Setting a6 AF point illumination pg 271 For information on setting focus point selection to wrap around see Custom Setting a7 Focus point
204. layed when zoom buttons or multi selector is pressed area currently visible in monitor is indicated by yellow border Press to cancel zoom View other areas of image Cancel zoom If the camera detects red eye in the selected photograph a copy will be created Create copy C that has been processed to reduce its effects No copy will be created if the camera is unable to detect red eye 335 Trim Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph The selected photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown in yellow create a cropped copy as described in the following table To Use Description Press the 9E button to reduce the size Reduce size of crop Qe T pu at si of the crop Increase size of Q Press the amp button to increase the size crop of the crop 7 Change cropaspect J Rotate the main command dial to ratio e 4 switch between aspect ratios of 3 2 rR 4 3 and 5 4 N Use multi selector to move the crop to Move crop J another area of the image Preview crop Press center of multi selector to preview cropped image Create copy Save the current crop as a separate file 336 M Trim Image Quality and Size Copies created from NEF RAW NEF RAW JPEG or TIFF RGB photos have an image quality pg 56 of JPEG fine cropped copies created from JPEG photos have the same image quality as the original
205. ler or a Nikon authorized service representative once every one to two years and that it be serviced once every three to five years note that fees apply to these services Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally Any accessories regularly used with the camera such as lenses or optional flash units should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced Getting to Know the Camera Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls and displays You may find it helpful to bookmark this section and refer to it as you read through the rest of the manual Camera Body 1 Release mode dial ccssceee 75 2 Release mode dial lock FElCASC seessessseesseessesssesseessees 75 3 QUAL image quality size DUTTON woececccsccssessessessesseesessess 57 60 Two button reset button 182 4 Eyelet for camera strap 19 5 WB white balance button woes 127 132 133 6 1S0 ISO sensitivity button 94 7 Accessory shoe for optional flash unit 364 9 Shutter release button 51 52 10 E4 exposure compensation BUTLO MisisssscseceiissaaniieatseatsiGavten 114 Two button reset button 182 11 MODE exposure mode DUTTON ccesescsssecessecccsneecesseessneees 103 et format DUTTON esses 41 12 Eyelet for camera strap 19 13 Focal plane mark 0 72 14 Control p
206. light falls on the low pass filter examine the filter for dust or lint If no foreign objects are present proceed to Step 7 6 Clean the filter Remove any dust and lint from the filter with a blower Do not use a blower brush as the bristles could damage the filter Dirt that can not be removed with a blower can only be removed by Nikon authorized service personnel Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe the filter 7 Turn the camera off The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter curtain will close Replace the lens or body cap 377 378 M Use a Reliable Power Source The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged If the camera powers off while the mirror is raised the curtain will close automatically To prevent damage to the curtain observe the following precautions Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source while the mirror is raised If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised a beep will sound and the self timer lamp will blink to warn that the shutter curtain will close and the mirror will be lowered after about two minutes End cleaning or inspection immediately vV Foreign Matter on the Low Pass Filter Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from coming into contact with the low pass filter during production and shipping The D300 however is designed to be used with interchangeable lenses a
207. ll drop Photographs can not be taken until processing is complete and Jab nar has cleared from the displays Noise reduction will not be performed if the camera is turned off before processing is complete Off default Long exposure noise reduction off 262 High ISO NR Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to reduce noise Option Description HIGH High Noise reduction is performed at ISO sensitivities of ISO Normal 800 and higher While photographs are being processed default the capacity of the memory buffer will drop Choose the amount of noise reduction performed from High Normal and Low Noise reduction is only performed at sensitivities of HI 0 3 and higher The amount of noise reduction is less than the amount performed when Low is selected for High ISO NR NORM LOW Low Off ISO Sensitivity Settings Adjust ISO sensitivity and ISO sensitivity auto control settings pp 94 96 Live View Choose a live view mode and the release mode that will be used when the camera is in live view mode pg 79 Multiple Exposure Create a single photograph from two to ten exposures pg 184 Interval Timer Shooting Take photographs automatically at pre selected intervals Use for time lapse movies of such subjects as flowers opening or butterflies emerging from cocoons pg 189 263 Custom Settings Fine Tuning Camera Settings Custom
208. lot cover Unlatch the card slot cover and open the card slot 3 Insert the memory card Insert the memory card with the front label toward the monitor D When the memory card is fully inserted the eject button will pop up and the green access lamp will light briefly Front Access lamp 1 Inserting Memory Cards Direction of insertion Insert the memory card terminals first Inserting the card upside down or backwards could damage the camera or the card Check to be sure that the card is in the correct orientation E Bar pe Terminals Front 39 4 Close the card slot cover r EE Removing Memory Cards 1 Turn the camera off Confirm that the access lamp is off and S E turn the camera off x i m Access lamp 2 Remove the memory card Open the memory card slot cover and press the eject button to partially eject the card The memory card can then be removed by hand Do not push on the memory card while pressing the eject button Failure to observe this precaution could damage the camera or memory card 40 Format the Memory Card Memory cards must be formatted before first use Format the card as described below vV Formatting Memory Cards Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may con
209. m speed display will show the number of intervals wal Jina remaining and the aperture display will show the number of shots remaining in the current interval At other times the number of intervals remaining and the number of shots in each interval can be viewed by pressing the shutter release button halfway once the button is released the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed until the exposure meters turn off To view current interval timer settings select ES Interval timer shooting Interval timer shooting between shots While A stat n interval timer photography is in progress the Off interval timer menu will show the starting time gt ery 2 the shooting interval and the number of intervals Sadi ge and shots remaining None of these items can be Move changed while interval timer photography is in progress 192 BE Pausing Interval Timer Photography Interval time photography can be paused by e Pressing the button between intervals e Highlighting Start gt Pause in the interval timer menu and pressing amp e Turning the camera off and then on again if desired the memory card can be replaced while the camera is off e Selecting live view self timer or mirror up MupP release modes To resume shooting 1 Choose anew starting E interval timer shootin trigger a ore y y Start time ca Choose a new starting trigger and start time as described on page 189 2
210. m CLS Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with built in flash SB 900 SB 800 or SU 800 as commander and SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 as remotes Auto FP High Speed Sync and modeling illumination supported with all CLS compatible flash units except SB 400 Flash Color Information Communication and FV lock supported with all CLS compatible flash units Sync terminal ISO 519 sync terminal with locking thread White balance White balance Auto TTL white balance with main image sensor and 1 005 segment RGB sensor 7 manual modes with fine tuning color temperature setting Live view Modes Hand held tripod Autofocus Hand held Phase detection AF with 51 focus points including 15 cross type sensors Tripod Contrast detect AF anywhere in frame 413 414 Monitor Monitor 3 in 920 000 dot VGA low temperature polysilicon TFT LCD with 170 viewing angle 100 frame coverage and brightness adjustment Playback Playback Full frame and thumbnail four or nine images playback with playback zoom slide show histogram display auto image rotation and image comment up to 36 characters Interface USB Hi Speed USB Video output Can be selected from NTSC and PAL HDMI output Version 1 3a with type A HDMI connector camera monitor turns off when HDMI cable is connected Ten pin remote terminal Can be used to connect optional remote control GP
211. m 200 to 400 aperture is stopped down by half an f stop If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above the maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens 408 Specifications EE Nikon D300 Digital Camera Type Type Single lens reflex digital camera Lens mount Nikon F mount with AF coupling and AF contacts Effective pictureangle Approx 1 5 x lens focal length Nikon DX format Effective pixels Effective pixels 12 3 million Image sensor Image sensor 23 6 x 15 8 mm CMOS sensor Total pixels 13 1 million Dust reduction System Image sensor cleaning Image Dust Off reference data requires following optional software Capture NX version 1 3 5 or later or Capture NX 2 version 2 1 0 or later Storage Image size pixels e 4 288 x 2 848 L e 3 216 x 2 136 M e 2 144 x 1 424 S File format e NEF RAW 12 or 14 bit lossless compressed compressed or uncompressed e TIFF RGB e JPEG JPEG Baseline compliant with fine approx 1 4 normal approx 1 8 or basic approx 1 16 compression Size priority Optimal quality compression available e NEF RAW JPEG Single photograph recorded in both NEF RAW and JPEG formats Picture Control System Can be selected from Standard Neutral Vivid Y Monochrome storage for up to nine custom Picture Controls Media Type and Il CompactFlash memory cards UDMA compliant microd
212. m Setting e5 set to AE amp flash Camera varies shutter speed and aperture PERA Flash speed Custom Setting e5 set to AE only or shutter aperture speed aperture and flash level Custom Setting e5 set to AE amp flash Flash Camera varies aperture Custom Setting e5 set to 19 aperture AE only or aperture and flash level Custom Setting e5 set to AE amp flash 4 Flashonly Camera varies flash level only Custom Setting e5 set to AE amp flash Flash bracketing is performed only with i TTL or AA flash control If a setting other than Flash only is selected and the flash is not used ISO sensitivity will be fixed at the value for the first shot regardless of the setting selected for ISO sensitivity auto control pg 96 e7 Bracketing Order At the default setting of MTR gt under gt over IN bracketing is performed in the order described on pages 118 and 122 If Under gt MTR gt over is selected shooting will proceed in order from the lowest to the highest value 299 300 f Controls f1 Multi Selector Center Button This option determines what operations can be performed by pressing the center of the multi selector in shooting and playback modes EE Shooting Mode Selecting Shooting mode displays the following options Option Description Select center RESET focus point default Pressing the center of the multi selector in shooting mode selects th
213. m ig z 4 Vv Vv Vv z Reflex Nikkor Y v w PC Nikkor v5 Y v iv Al type Teleconverter 8 vs Y V vigi A PB 6 Bellows Focusing v vl lya L Attachment Auto extension rings PK series 11A 12 0r 13 v Y i v iv PN 11 1 IX Nikkor lenses can not be used 2 Vibration Reduction VR supported with VR lenses 3 Spot metering meters selected focus point 4 The camera s exposure metering and flash control systems do not work properly when shifting and or tilting the lens or when an aperture other than the maximum aperture is used 5 Electronic rangefinder can not be used with shifting or tilting 6 Manual exposure mode only 7 Can be used with AF S and AF I lenses only pg 353 8 With maximum effective aperture of f 5 6 or faster 10 11 12 16 17 20 When focusing at minimum focus distance with AF 80 200mm f 2 8 AF 35 70mm f 2 8 AF 28 85mm f 3 5 4 5 lt New gt or AF 28 85mm f 3 5 4 5 lens at maximum zoom in focus indicator may be displayed when image on matte screen in viewfinder is not in focus Adjust focus manually until image in viewfinder is in focus With maximum aperture of f 5 6 or faster Some lenses can not be used see page 352 Range of rotation for Al 80 200mm f 2 8 ED tripod mount is limited by camera body Filters can not be exchanged while Al 200 400mm f 4 ED is mounted on camera
214. mal 277 exposure How can I reduce blur Exposure delay mode 285 Can the flash be used at shutter speeds Flash sync speed 288 faster than 1 250 s EE Viewing Photographs Question Key phrase See page Can I view my photographs on the Camera playback 204 camera Can I view more information about Photo info 206 photos Why do parts of my photos blink Photo info highlights 208 250 vii viii Question Key phrase See page How do get rid of an unwanted photo Deleting individual 222 photos Can I delete several photos at once Delete 248 Can loom in on pictures to make sure Playback zoom 220 they re in focus Can protect photos from accidental Protect 221 deletion Can I hide selected photos Hide image 249 How do l tell if parts of my photos may be Display mode eae 250 overexposed highlights How do I tell where the camera focused veg mode focus 250 Can I view photos as they are taken Image review 251 Is there an automatic playback slide Slide show 252 show option EE Retouching Photographs Question Key phrase See page How do I bring out details in shadows D Lighting 334 Can I get rid of red eye Red eye correction 335 Can I crop photographs on the camera Trim 336 Can I create a monochrome copy of a Monochrome 337 photograph Can I create a copy with different colors Filter effects 338 Can I use the camera to create JPEG copies of NEF RA
215. maximum aperture of f 5 6 or faster the viewfinder focus indicator can be used to confirm whether the subject in the selected focus point is in focus the focus point can be selected from any of the 51 focus points After positioning the subject in the selected focus point press the shutter release button halfway and rotate the lens focusing ring until the in focus indicator is displayed Note that with the subjects listed on page 70 the in focus indicator may sometimes be displayed when the subject is not in focus confirm focus in the viewfinder before shooting Focal Plane Position To determine the distance between your subject and the camera measure from the focal plane mark 6 on the camera body The distance between the lens mounting flange and the focal plane is 46 5 mm 1 83 in Focal plane mark Release Mode Single Frame Continuous Live View Self Timer or Mirror Up Release mode determines how the camera takes photographs one at a time in a continuous sequence with the view through the lens displayed in the monitor with a timed shutter release Sy delay or with the mirror raised to enhance shutter response and minimize vibration Choosing a Release MOde cscscscsssssssssecssscsesececseees pg 74 Continuous Modems eenean ten eeaeee teet EAE Eee Sots pg 76 Framing Pictures in the Monitor Live View pg 79 Self TIME MOGE eieiccsscsscc
216. mputer NEF RAW images can only be viewed using ViewNX version 1 2 0 or later or other compatible software such as Capture NX version 1 3 5 or later or Capture NX 2 version 2 1 0 or later available separately pg 368 Record uncompressed TIFF RGB images at a bit TIFF RGB TIFF depth of 8 bits per channel 24 bit color TIFF is RGB supported by a wide variety of imaging applications JPEG fine Record JPEG images ata compression ratio of roughly 1 4 fine image quality JPEG normal JPEG Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 8 normal image quality JPEG basic Record JPEG images ata compression ratio of roughly 1 16 basic image quality NEF RAW Two images are recorded one NEF RAW image JPEG fine and one fine quality JPEG image NEF RAW NEF _ Two images are recorded one NEF RAW image JPEG normal JPEG and one normal quality JPEG image NEF RAW Two images are recorded one NEF RAW image JPEG basic and one basic quality JPEG image Size priority File Size selected for JPEG compression See page 405 for information on the number of pictures that can be recorded at different image quality and size settings 56 Image quality is set by pressing the QUAL button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel QUAL button Main command dial L 547 Control panel NEF RAW Recording The NEF RA
217. n Non CPU lens data menu pg 197 2 Metered area is not actually displayed in viewfinder 100 To choose a metering method Metering selector rotate the metering selector until the desired mode is displayed 3D Color Matrix II Metering In matrix metering exposure is set using a 1 005 segment RGB sensor Use a type Gor D lens for results that include range information 3D color matrix metering II see page 352 for information on lens types With other CPU lenses 3D range information is not included color matrix metering Il Color matrix metering is available when focal length and maximum aperture of non CPU lens are specified using Non CPU lens data item in setup menu see page 197 center weighted metering is used if focal length or aperture is not specified See Also For information on choosing the size of the area assigned the greatest weight in center weighted metering see Custom Setting b5 Center weighted area pg 277 For information on making separate adjustments to optimal exposure for each metering method see Custom Setting b6 Fine tune optimal exposure pg 277 101 Exposure Mode Exposure mode determines how the camera sets shutter speed and aperture when adjusting exposure Four modes are available programmed auto F shutter priority auto 5 aperture priority auto Fi and manual M Mode Description Camera sets shutter speed an
218. n the current playback folder pg 249 Hidden images pg 249 are not displayed Option Description Start Start slide show Frame interval Choose how long each picture will be displayed To start the slide show highlight Start and press The following operations can be performed while the slide show is in progress To Press Description Skip back skip Press lt q to return to previous frame to skip ahead to next frame View additional photo info Change photo info displayed pg 206 Pause slide show Pause slide show see below Exit to playback MENU End slide show and return to playback menu menu Exit to playback End slide show and exit to full frame pg 204 mode PI or thumbnail playback pg 218 Exit to shooting Press shutter release button halfway to return mode L to shooting mode A dialog shown at right is displayed when the show ends or when the button is pressed to pause playback Select Restart to restart if the slide was paused the show will resume from the next slide or Exit to 2s Frame interval Eit return to the playback menu 252 Print Set DPOF Choose Select set to select pictures for printing on a DPOF compatible device pg 240 Choose Deselect all to remove all pictures from the current print order 253 amp The Shooting Menu Shooting Options The shooting menu contain
219. n the event of continued malfunction contact your retailer or Nikon authorized service representative Note that disconnecting the power source as described above may result in loss of any data not recorded to the memory card at the time the problem occurred Data already recorded to the card will not be affected 383 384 BE Shooting Problem Solution Page Camera takes time to turn on Delete files or folders Shutter release disabled Memory card is full or not inserted CPU lens with aperture ring attached but aperture not locked at highest f number If FE E is displayed in control panel select Aperture ring for Custom Setting f7 Customize command dials gt Aperture setting to use lens aperture ring to adjust aperture Exposure mode S selected with tu L a selected for shutter speed 39 45 307 106 Photos are out of focus Rotate focus mode selector to or Camera unable to focus using autofocus use manual focus or focus lock 62 68 71 Full range of shutter speeds not available Flash in use Flash sync speed can be selected using Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed when using optional SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 Speedlight choose 1 320 s Auto FP or 1 250 s Auto FP for full range of shutter speeds 288 Focus does not lock when shutter release button is pressed halfway Camera is in focus mode C use AE L AF L button
220. n the monitor one minute before each series of shots is taken If shooting can not proceed at current settings for example if a shutter speed of trust by is currently selected in manual exposure mode or the start time is in less than a minute a warning will be displayed in the monitor The Viewfinder Eyepiece Cap In exposure modes other than manual cover the viewfinder with the supplied DK 5 eyepiece cap after focusing This prevents light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure 191 M Out of Memory If the memory card is full the interval timer will remain active but no pictures will be taken Resume shooting pg 193 after deleting some pictures or turning the camera off and inserting another memory card Bracketing Adjust bracketing settings before starting interval timer photography If exposure and or flash bracketing is active while interval timer photography is in effect the camera will take the number of shots in the bracketing program at each interval regardless of the number of shots specified in the interval timer menu If white balance bracketing is active while interval timer photography is in effect the camera will take one shot at each interval and process it to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program During Shooting During interval timer photography the icon in the control panel will blink Immediately before the next shooting interval begins the shutter o
221. natural results Choose for ENL Neutral photographs that will later be extensively processed or retouched Pictures are enhanced for a vivid photoprint effect ENI Vivid Choose for photographs that emphasize primary colors EMC Monochrome Take monochrome photographs ESD Standard BE Choosing a Picture Control 1 Select Set Picture Control In the shooting menu pg 254 wee Manan ture ote S highlight Set Picture Control Se and press P k gt ECTE High ISO NR E 1S0 sensitivity settings 2 Selecta Picture Control ERAT O ED Standard Highlight the desired Picture Ie enc Monochrome Control and press G2Grid GaAdiust 148 The Picture Control Grid Pressing the 9H button in Step 2 displays a Picture Control grid showing the contrast and saturation for the selected Picture Control in relation to the other Picture Controls only contrast is displayed when Monochrome is selected To select a different Picture Control 2 GAdiust DOK press A or Y then press gt to display Picture Control options and press The Picture Control Indicator The current Picture Control is shown in the shooting information display when the MA button is pressed Picture Control indicator 149 150 Modifying Existing Picture Controls Existing Nikon or custom Picture Controls Vivid can be modified to suit the scene or the 1 Sharpening user s creative intent Choose a
222. nce 121 Number of intervals for interval timer photography sssssssssssrsssssrresssssrrsssss 192 Focal length non CPU lenses 3 Flash sync indicator 4 Flexible program indicator 105 5 Exposure mode 6 Image size 13 Battery indicator pa rr K 12 BAA lt ak y a PRE 10 7 Image quality 0 ecsseescesseecesseeeees 8 Auto area AF indicator AF area mode indicator 3D tracking indicator 9 White balance fine tuning ING CATO issan 132 10 White balance wn csecsesssessenee 127 11 Number of exposures FOTIA UIA sissi asia 45 Number of shots remaining before memory buffer fills 77 Capture mode indicatot 224 Preset white balance recording indicator Manual lens number 12 K appears when memory remains for over 1000 exposures 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Flash MOeC sssccsssccesseceeseeeeeee 171 Beep indicator e ssssecseeceeeeesees 281 Aperture f number 107 109 Aperture number of stops seesseecceeeceees 353 Exposure and flash bracketing increment 118 WB bracketing increment 122 Number of shots per HIMCOR Vall sssssssssassssoassisassssssssasssetcasscaste 192 Maximum aperture NON CPU lenses csssesseseeees 198 PC mode indicator 0 essen 227 Aperture stop indicatov 353 Flash compensation
223. nd foreign matter may enter the camera when lenses are removed or exchanged Once inside the camera this foreign matter may adhere to the low pass filter where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions To protect the camera when no lens is in place be sure to replace the body cap provided with the camera being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign matter that may be adhering to the body cap Should foreign matter find its way onto the low pass filter clean the filter as described above or have the filter cleaned by authorized Nikon service personnel Photographs affected by the presence of foreign matter on the filter can be retouched using Capture NX version 1 3 5 or later or Capture NX 2 version 2 1 0 or later available separately pg 368 or the clean image options available in some third party imaging applications m Servicing the Camera and Accessories The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing Nikon recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or Nikon service representative once every one to two years and that it be serviced once every three to five years note that fees apply to these services Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally Any accessories regularly used with the camera such as lenses or optional Speedlights should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced Caring for the C
224. ndard i TTL flash for digital SLR Flash output adjusted to bring lighting in frame to standard level brightness of background is not taken into account Recommended for shots in which main subject is emphasized at expense of background details or when exposure compensation is used Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is activated automatically when spot metering is selected 1 ISO Sensitivity i TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 200 and 3200 At values over 3200 or under 200 the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings Using the Built in Flash Follow these steps when using the built in flash 1 Choosea metering method Metering selector pg 100 Select matrix or center weighted metering to activate i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is activated automatically when spot metering is selected 2 Press the flash pop up button The built in flash will pop up and begin charging When the flash is fully charged the flash ready indicator 4 will light 3 Choose a flash mode Press the 4 button and rotate the main command dial until the desired flash mode icon is displayed in the control panel pg 174 4 button Main command dial Control panel 171 172 4 Check exposure shutter speed and aperture Press the shutter release button hal
225. ng and aperture value display supported if user provides lens data Al lenses only Shutter Type Electronically controlled vertical travel focal plane shutter Speed 1 8000 30 s in steps of 1 3 1 2 or 1 EV bulb X250 Flash sync speed X 1 250 s synchronizes with shutter at 320 s or slower flash range drops at speeds between 250 and 1 320 s Release Release mode S single frame CL continuous low speed CH continuous high speed live view self timer Mop mirror up Frame advance rate e With EN EL3e Up to 6 fps e With optional MB D10 multi power battery pack and EN EL4a EN EL4 or AA batteries or with optional EH 5a EH 5 AC adapter Up to 7 CL or 8 fps CH Self timer Can be selected from 2 5 10 and 20 s duration Exposure Metering TTL exposure metering using 1 005 segment RGB sensor Metering method Matrix 3D color matrix metering II type G and D lenses color matrix metering II other CPU lenses color matrix metering available with non CPU lenses if user provides lens data Center weighted Weight of 75 given to 8 mm circle in center of frame Diameter of circle can be changed to 6 10 or 13 mm or weighting can be based on average of entire frame fixed at 8 mm when non CPU lens is used Spot Meters 3 mm circle about 2 of frame centered on selected focus point on center focus point when non CPU lens is used Range ISO 100 f 1
226. ng the size of the increments available when setting flash compensation see Custom Setting b3 Exp comp fine tune pg 275 177 FV Lock This feature is used to lock flash output allowing photographs to be recomposed without changing the flash level and ensuring that flash output is appropriate to the subject even when the subject is not positioned in the center of the frame Flash output is adjusted automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and aperture To use FV lock 1 Assign FV lock to the Fn button 4 Asian FUNC button button press Select FV lock for Custom Setting f4 a Assign FUNC button gt FUNC button Pi He AE lock Reset on release press pg 302 S AE lock Hold E fa AF lock only 2 Press the flash pop up button The built in flash will pop up and begin charging Flash pop up button 3 Focus Position the subject in the center of the frame and press the shutter release button halfway to focus 178 4 Lock flash level After confirming that the flash ready indicator is displayed in the viewfinder press the Fn button The flash will emit a monitor preflash to determine the appropriate flash level Fn button Flash output will be locked at this level D_E EEEE and FV lock icons m will appear in the a control panel and viewfinder ales qm 5497 TSA wA EDE 5 Recompose the photograph
227. ning the exposure count displays in the control panel and viewfinder will flash and the shutter release will be Poss disabled Shooting can begin when a GAN all a an new memory card is inserted 123 124 BE Canceling Bracketing To cancel bracketing press the Fn button and rotate the main command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero GF and is no longer displayed in the control panel The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two button reset pg 182 although in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated White Balance Bracketing White balance bracketing is not available at an image quality of NEF RAW Selecting NEF RAW NEF RAW JPEG fine NEF RAW JPEG normal or NEF RAW JPEG basic cancels white balance bracketing White balance bracketing affects only color temperature the amber blue axis in the white balance fine tuning display pg 129 No adjustments are made on the green magenta axis In self timer mode pg 89 the number of copies specified in the white balance program will be created each time the shutter is released If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit the camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have been recorded White Balance Kee
228. ns in the camera monitor are shown in brackets Interval timer shooting 189 Interval timer shooting 189 ISO sensitivity 93 94 96 ISO sensitivity settings 95 ISO sensitivity 95 ISO sensitivity auto control 96 Maximum sensitivity 96 Minimum shutter speed 96 ISO sensitivity step value 275 i TTL 170 171 293 357 J JPEG 56 58 JPEG basic 56 JPEG compression 58 Optimal quality 58 Size priority 58 JPEG fine 56 JPEG normal 56 L L 60 LAN 365 Language 36 315 LCD 46 285 312 LCD brightness 312 LCD illumination 285 Lens 34 196 327 350 attaching 34 cap 35 cap rear 34 35 compatible 350 CPU 35 352 distance information 170 focus mode switch 34 35 focus ring 35 71 mounting index 35 non CPU 196 data 197 removing 35 type D 352 type G 352 Lens mount 5 72 Live view 79 Live view mode 80 83 Hand held 80 Tripod 83 Release mode 80 Live view 79 88 LO 95 Local area network 365 Lock mirror up for cleaning 376 Long exp NR 262 M M 62 71 81 109 Magenta 130 338 Manage Picture Control 154 Manual 62 71 81 109 Mass Storage 225 Matrix 100 101 278 Max continuous release 282 MB D10 274 285 287 322 365 MB D10 battery type 285 Memory buffer 51 74 77 78 Memory card 39 312 371 capacity of 405 formatting 41 312 Metering 100 center weighted 100 277 278 matrix 100 101 278 selector 49 10
229. nuous servo AF the camera will initiate predictive focus tracking if the subject moves toward or away from the camera while the shutter release button is pressed halfway or the AF 0N button is pressed This allows the camera to track focus while attempting to predict where the subject will be when the shutter is released See Also For information on using focus priority in continuous servo AF see Custom Setting a1 AF C priority selection pg 267 For information on using release priority in single servo AF see Custom Setting a2 AF S priority selection pg 268 For information on preventing the camera from focusing when the shutter release button is pressed halfway see Custom Setting a5 AF activation pg 271 63 De 64 AF Area Mode AF area mode determines how the y focus point is selected in autofocus mode To select the AF area mode o rotate the AF area mode selector re The following options are available t Z AF area mode selector Mode Description a User selects focus point manually camera focuses on Single subject in selected focus point only Use for relatively static compositions with subjects that will stay in selected focus point AF point e In continuous servo AF pg 62 user selects focus point manually if subject briefly leaves selected focus point camera will focus based on information from surrounding t points Number
230. ocus points Choose when photographing subjects that are moving unpredictably e g players at a football game 3 51 51 points If the subject leaves the selected focus point the camera will focus based on information from the surrounding 50 focus points Choose when photographing subjects that are moving quickly and can not be easily framed in the viewfinder e g birds 269 Option Description If the subject leaves the selected focus point the camera will use 3D tracking to track the subject 51 points and select a new focus point as required Use to 3D tracking quickly compose pictures with subjects that are moving erratically from side to side e g tennis players If the subject leaves the viewfinder remove your finger from the shutter release button and recompose the photograph with the subject in the selected focus point 2 3D 3D tracking When the shutter release button is pressed halfway the colors in the area surrounding the focus point are stored in the camera Consequently 3D tracking may not produce the desired results with subjects that are the same color as the background or that occupy a very small area of the frame a4 Focus Tracking with Lock On This option controls how autofocus adjusts to sudden large changes in the distance to the subject Option Description AFE Long When the distance to the subject changes abruptly the AFE Normal camera waits
231. of focus points used can be selected from Dynamic 9 21 and 51 using Custom Setting a3 Dynamic AF areal aren AE pg 269 If 51 points 3D tracking is selected for Custom Setting a3 focus point will be selected automatically using 3D tracking Insingle servo AF user selects focus point manually camera focuses on subject in selected focus point only Camera automatically detects subject and selects focus point If type Gor D lens is used camera can distinguish human subjects from Auto area background for improved subject AF detection In single servo AF active focus points are highlighted for about one second after camera focuses Active focus points are not displayed in continuous servo AF AF Area Mode AF area mode is shown in the control panel i25 F56 Ic e AF area mode indicator AF area mode Control panel Single point AF Custom Setting a3 Dynamic AF area pg 269 H 9 points default a Dynamic 21 points area AF 51 points 51 points 3D tracking Auto area AF Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder Remaining focus points provide information to assist focus operation Manual Focus Single point AF is automatically selected when manual focus is used See Also For information on the settings available in dynamic area AF see Custom Setting a3 Dynamic AF area pg 269 For information on ad
232. of frame Stand alone flash unit KA Area metered by flash exposure meter Used with other flash i TTL Entire frame units Advanced AA Area metered by flash exposure Wireless Lighting A master flash meter See Also For information on using the depth of field preview or AE L AF L button for FV lock see Custom Setting f5 Assign preview button pg 305 or Custom Setting f6 Assign AE L AF L button pg 306 Other Shooting Options This chapter covers restoring default settings making multiple exposures interval timer photography and using GPS units and non CPU lenses Two Button Reset Restoring Default Settings pg 182 MUItIDIGIEXPOSUNGhremceccretecereererctrcterecsttereertrertece pg 184 Interval Timer Photography cccscccscssscsesssscseees pg 189 NON CRU LENSES lt ccc cccccestesccescescecessssssccescascecescaccavsoccesress pg 196 Using a GPS UNIT aeee eeaeee eaeoe reee resar SeeSee a T pg 199 181 182 Two Button Reset Restoring Default Settings The camera settings listed below can be restored to default values by holding the QUAL and buttons down together for more than two seconds these buttons are marked by a green dot The control panel turns off button briefly while settings are reset QUAL button Option Default Option Default Focus point Center Bracketing Off 2 Exposure mode Programmed Flash mode Front curtain auto sync Flexible prog
233. off fi AF lock only Focus locks while the MB D10 AF ON button is pressed Same as FUNC button The MB D10 AF ON button performs the function selected for Custom Setting f4 pg 302 b Metering Exposure b1 ISO Sensitivity Step Value This option determines whether Option adjustments to sensitivity are made in 1 3 1 3 step default increments equivalent to 3 EV 2EV or 4 2 1 2 step 1 EV 1 1step b2 EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl This option determines whether adjustments to shutter speed aperture and bracketing are made in increments equivalent to 1 3 EV 1 2 EV or 1 EV Option Description Changes to shutter speed and aperture are in increments equivalent to 3 EV The bracketing increment can be selected from 3 2 3 and 1 EV Changes to shutter speed and aperture are in increments 1 2 1 2 step equivalent to 2 EV The bracketing increment can be selected from 2 and 1 EV Changes to shutter speed and aperture are in increments equivalent to 1 EV The bracketing increment is set to 1 EV 1 3 step 13 default 1 1step b3 Exp Comp Fine Tune This option determines whether Option adjustments to exposure and flash 1 3 1 3 step default compensation are made in increments 1 2 1 2 step equivalent to 3 EV 2 EV or 1 EV 1 1step 275 b4 Easy Exposure Compensation This option controls whether the amp button is needed to set exp
234. ographs that can be taken at current settings When this number reaches zero 3 will flash in the exposure count 3 displays while the shutter speed displays will show a blinking F wit Or Fuk Large Capacity Memory Cards When enough memory remains on the memory card to record a thousand or more pictures at current settings the number of exposures remaining will be shown in thousands rounded down to the nearest hundred e g if there is TD room for approximately 1 260 exposures the exposure count display will show 1 2 K pes F56 EA _ tel a NORM 45 46 LCD IIluminators Holding the power switch in the 8 Power switch position activates the exposure meters and control panel backlights LCD illuminators allowing the display to be read in the dark After the power switch is released the illuminator will remain lit for six seconds at default settings while the camera exposure meters are active or until the shutter is released Auto Meter Off At default settings the shutter speed and aperture displays in the control panel and viewfinder will turn off if no operations are performed for about six seconds auto meter off reducing the drain on the battery Press the shutter release button halfway to reactivate the display in the viewfinder pg 52 L Exposure meters on Exposure meters off Exposure meters on The length of time
235. omize command dials E18 Release button to use dial 264 The following Custom Settings are available Custom Setting Page Custom Setting Page Custom setting bank 266 d Shooting display Reset custom settings 266 d4 CL mode shooting speed 282 a Autofocus d5 Max continuous release 282 al AF C priority selection 267 d6 File number sequence 283 a2 AF S priority selection 268 d7 Shooting info display 284 a3 Dynamic AF area 269 d8 LCD illumination 285 a4 Focus tracking with lock on 270 49 Exposure delay mode 285 a5 AF activation 271 d10 MB D10 battery type 285 a6 AF point illumination 271 d Battery order 287 a7 Focus point wrap around 272 e Bracketing flash a8 AF point selection 272 el Flash sync speed 288 a9 Built in AF assist illuminator 273 e2 Flash shutter speed 290 a10 AF ON for MB D10 274 8 Flash cntrl for built in flash 291 b Metering exposure e4 Modeling flash 297 b1 ISO sensitivity step value 275 amp 5 Auto bracketing set 297 b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl 275 Auto bracketing Mode M 298 b3 Exp comp fine tune 275 _ amp 7 Bracketing order 299 b4 Easy exposure compensation 276 f Controls b5 Center weighted area 277 fl Multi selector center button 300 b6 Fine tune optimal exposure 277 f2 Multi
236. on digital cameras For information on connecting the unit see the manual provided with the GP 1 199 200 BE Other GPS Units Optional Garmin GPS units that conform to version 2 01 or 3 01 of the National Marine Electronics Association NMEA0183 data format can be connected to the camera s ten pin remote terminal using an MC 35 GPS adapter cord available separately pg 370 Operation has been confirmed with Garmin eTrex and Garmin geko series devices equipped with a PC interface cable connector These devices connect to the MC 35 using a cable with a D sub 9 pin connector provided by the manufacturer of the GPS device See the MC 35 instruction manual for details Before turning the camera on set the GPS device to NMEA mode 4800 baud HE The Icon When the camera establishes communication with a GPS device a icon will be displayed in the control panel Photo information for pictures taken while the icon is displayed will include a page of GPS data pg 215 including the current latitude longitude altitude Coordinated Universal Time UTC and heading if supported If no data are received from the GPS unit for two seconds the W icon will clear from the display and the camera will stop recording GPS information GPS Data GPS data are only recorded when the amp icon is displayed Confirm that the icon is displayed in the control panel before shooting A flashing amp icon indicates
237. on as expected check the list of common problems below before consulting your retailer or Nikon representative Refer to the page numbers in the right most column for more information HE Display Problem Solution Page Adjust viewfinder focus or use optional diopter adjustment lenses Viewfinder is dark Insert a fully charged battery 44 Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay 279 280 or c4 Monitor off delay Unusual characters See A Note on Electronically displayed in control panel Controlled Cameras below Displays in control panel The response times and brightness or viewfinder are of these displays varies with unresponsive and dim temperature Fine lines are visible around active focus point or display turns red when focus point is highlighted Viewfinder is out of focus 43 Displays turn off without warning 383 These phenomena are normal for this type of viewfinder and do not indicate a malfunction A Note on Electronically Controlled Cameras In extremely rare instances unusual characters may appear in the control panel and the camera may stop functioning In most cases this phenomenon is caused by a strong external static charge Turn the camera off remove and replace the battery and turn the camera on again or if you are using an AC adapter available separately disconnect and reconnect the adapter and turn the camera on again I
238. on warranty The use of third party rechargeable Li ion batteries not bearing the Nikon holographic seal on Nikon Niki PYHIN UONIN uo shown at right could interfere with normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating igniting rupturing or leaking For more information about Nikon brand accessories contact a local authorized Nikon dealer xxiii XxiV Before Taking Important Pictures Before taking pictures on important occasions such as at weddings or before taking the camera on a trip take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning normally Nikon will not be held liable for damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction Life Long Learning As part of Nikon s Life Long Learning commitment to ongoing product support and education continually updated information is available on line at the following sites e For users in the U S A http www nikonusa com e For users in Europe and Africa http www europe nikon com support e For users in Asia Oceania and the Middle East http www nikon asia com Visit these sites to keep up to date with the latest product information tips answers to frequently asked questions FAQs and general advice on digital imaging and photography Additional information may be available from the Nikon representative in your area See the following URL for contact information http imaging nikon com Introduction
239. ons that e are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60 e are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields such as televisions or radios e are exposed to temperatures above 50 C 122 F or below 10 C 14 F Cleaning Use a blower to remove dust and lint then wipe gently with a soft dry cloth After using the camera at the beach or seaside Camera wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly dampened in distilled body water and dry thoroughly Important Dust or other foreign matter inside the camera may cause damage not covered under warranty These glass elements are easily damaged Remove dust and Lens lint with a blower If using an aerosol blower keep the can mirror and vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid To remove viewfinder fingerprints and other stains apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care Remove dust and lint with a blower When removing fingerprints and other stains wipe the surface lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather Do not apply pressure as this could result in damage or malfunction Monitor Do not use alcohol thinner or other volatile chemicals The Low Pass Filter The image sensor that acts as the camera s picture element is fitted with a low pass filter to prevent moir If you suspect that dirt or dust on the filter is appearing in photographs you can clean the filter using the Clean image sensor op
240. oose tab 2 Selecta menu i Add items Highlight the name of the E Playback menu menu containing the option DE Sean l Setup menu you wish to add and press j Sa Rania 3 Select anitem E Additems O Shooting menu bank Highlight the desired menu oo oaii item and press ae Image size JPEG compression NEF RAW recording 344 4 Position the new item E Choose position E o Press A or W to move the new ES item up or down in My Menu jee t4 Assign FUNC button g a Press to add the new item 5 Add more items E Add items Shooting menu bank The items currently displayed in My E n Aamin Menu are indicated by a check mark ONNEEN Items indicated by a N icon can not be serene compression selected Repeat steps 1 4 to select NEF RAW recording additional items 345 Deleting Options from My Menu 1 Select Remove items In My Menu 1 highlight Remove items and press gt 2 Select items E Remove items Done Highlight items and press gt to __ OC imase ty select or deselect Selected f AE o ne am reran items are indicated by a check ji 14 Asin FUNC button mark 3 select Done E Remove itens 5 Highlight Done and press E imapa esity A confirmation dialog will be E o ne amnas displayed o t4 Assign FUNC button 4 Delete the selected items Press to delete the selected __ yeer items ol wre Cancel
241. ooting begins To ensure that shooting is not interrupted be sure the battery is fully charged 189 190 3 Choose a start time E interval timer shooting A Start time Press lt or P to highlight hours it oos or minutes press A or W to AN Tiere change The starting time is f cod dp not displayed if Now is VW DET selected for Choose start time Choose an interval Ba Interval timer shooting Olnterval Press lt or gt to highlight _ oes hours minutes or seconds lt gt ieee press A or W to change Note that the camera will not be able to take photographs at the specified interval if it is shorter than the shutter speed or the time required to record images 5 Choose the number of intervals and number of shots per interval no of shots DOE x 2 0006 gt Press lt or gt to highlight number of intervals or number of shots press A or W to ued change The total number of 003 x 2 000 shots that will be taken is z L displayed to the right Numberof Number Total intervals of shots number of interval shots Ner w w 6 Start shooting Highlight Start gt On and press to return to the shooting menu without starting the interval timer highlight Start gt Off and press The first series of shots will be taken at the specified starting time Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all shots have been taken A message will be displayed i
242. opies are indicated by a amp 4 icon ll Creating Retouched Copies from the Retouch Menu 1 Select an item in the RETOUCH MENU Dlighting retouch menu Rade conviction Trim Press A or W to highlight an item gt to select Depending on the option selected a menu may be displayed highlight an option and press gt Filter effects Color balance Image overlay X x 9 h 2 Selecta picture E Blackandwhite F 1 Kg 2 Faz 3 The pictures on the memory F card will be displayed Use the AA amp multi selector to highlight a picture to view the highlighted picture full screen press and hold the button 331 3 Display retouch options Press to display retouch options see the section for the selected option for details To exit without creating a retouched copy press MENU 4 Create a retouched copy Press to create a retouched copy Retouched copies are indicated by a amp 4 icon 332 vV Retouching Copies Copies created with Trim can not be further modified D lighting red eye correction filter effects and color balance can not be applied to monochrome copies Otherwise the options in the retouch menu can each be applied once to existing copies although this may result in loss of detail Image Quality Except in the case of copies created with Trim pg 336 and Image overlay copies created from JPEG images are the same size and quality as
243. or cover when transporting the camera or leaving it unattended 381 Batteries Dirt on the battery terminals can prevent the camera from functioning and should be removed with a soft dry cloth before use Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled Observe the following precautions when handling batteries Turn the product off before replacing the battery The battery may become hot when used for extended periods Observe due caution when handling the battery Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat After removing the battery from the camera be sure to replace the terminal cover Charge the battery before use When taking photographs on important occasions ready a spare EN EL3e battery and keep it fully charged Depending on your location it may be difficult to purchase replacement batteries on short notice On cold days the capacity of batteries tends to decrease Be sure the battery is fully charged before taking photographs outside in cold weather Keep a spare battery in a warm place and exchange the two as necessary Once warmed a cold battery may recover some of its charge Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair battery performance Used batteries are a valuable resource Please recycle used batteries in accord with local regulations Troubleshooting If the camera fails to functi
244. or the exposure meters turn off a AElock Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed and AER Hold remains locked until the button is pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn off fa AF lock only Focus locks while the Fn button is pressed Flash off The flash will not fire in photos taken while the Fn button is pressed Option Description If the Fn button is pressed while exposure or flash bracketing is active in single frame release mode all shots in the current bracketing program will be taken each time the shutter release button is g pressed If white balance bracketing is active or BKT Bracketing continuous release mode mode CH or CL is burst selected the camera will repeat the bracketing burst while the shutter release button is held down in single frame release mode white balance bracketing will be repeated at the frame rate for CH release mode Matrix Matrix metering is activated while the Fn button is metering pressed 5 Center Center weighted metering is activated while the Fn weighted button is pressed g Spot Spot metering is activated while the Fn button is metering pressed None No operation is performed when the Fn button is default pressed This option can not be used in combination with FUNC button dials pg 304 Selecting this options displays a message and sets FUNC button dials to None If another option is selected for FUNC but
245. orary storage allowing shooting to continue while photographs are being saved to the memory card Up to 100 photographs can be taken in succession note however that frame rate will drop when the buffer is full In rare cases frame rate may also drop when a microdrive memory card is used While photographs are being recorded to the memory card the access lamp next to the memory card slot will light Depending on the number of the images in the buffer recording may take from a few seconds to a few minutes Do not remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source until the access lamp has gone out If the camera is switched off while data remain in the buffer the power will not turn off until all images in the buffer have been recorded If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer the shutter release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory card See Also For information on choosing the maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst see Custom Setting d5 Max continuous release pg 282 For information on the number of pictures that can be taken in a single burst see page 405 Framing Pictures in the Monitor Live View Select live view mode to frame pictures in the monitor The following options are available Hand held A Choose when taking hand held shots of moving subjects or when framing photographs at angles that make it difficult to use the v
246. osure compensation pg 114 If On Auto reset or On is selected the 0 at the center of the exposure display will blink even when exposure compensation is set to 0 Option Description Exposure compensation is set by rotating one of the command dials see note below The setting On Auto selected using the command dial is reset when the reset camera or exposure meters turn off exposure compensation settings selected using the amp button are not reset RESET As above except that the exposure compensation On value selected using the command dial is not reset when the camera or exposure meters turn off Off Exposure compensation is set by pressing the default button and rotating the main command dial Change Main Sub The dial used to set exposure compensation when On Auto reset or On is selected for Custom Setting b4 Easy exposure compensation depends on the option selected for Custom Setting f7 Customize command dials gt Change main sub pg 307 Customize command dials gt Change main sub Off default On m Sub command dial Sub command dial 2 3 4 Sub command dial Main command dial 2 2A Main command dial Sub command dial Car N A 276 b5 Center Weighted Area When calculating exposure center Option weighted metering assigns the greatest 6 bp 6mm weight toa circle in the center of the frame 98 b 8mm default The diameter p of this
247. out a sync cable pg 358 The accessory shoe is equipped with a safety lock for Speedlights with a locking pin such as the SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SB 400 HE The Sync Terminal A sync cable can be connected to the sync terminal as required Do not connect another flash unit via a sync cable when performing rear curtain sync flash photography with a flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe 1 ISO Sensitivity When auto ISO sensitivity control is on pg 96 ISO sensitivity will automatically be adjusted as required for optimal flash output when an optional SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB 400 flash unit is attached This may result in foreground subjects being underexposed in photographs taken with the flash at slow shutter speeds in daylight or against a bright background In these cases choose a flash mode other than slow sync or choose a larger aperture 364 Other Accessories At the time of writing the following accessories were available for the D300 Power sources Rechargeable Li ion Battery EN EL3e pp 30 32 Additional EN EL3e batteries are available from local retailers and Nikon service representatives The EN EL3e can be recharged using an MH 18a or MH 18 quick charger Multi Power Battery Pack MB D10 The MB D10 takes one rechargeable Nikon EN EL3e EN EL4a or EN EL4 Li ion battery or eight AA alkaline NiMH lithium or nickel manganese batteries A BL 3
248. ove Camera focuses on subject in center focus point when shutter release button is pressed halfway 47 48 2 Choose exposure mode F MODE button Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial to select exposure mode F The camera will automatically adjust shutter speed and aperture for optimal exposure in most situations Main command dial 3 Choose single frame Release mode dial release mode lock release Hold the release mode dial lock release down and turn the release mode dial to S single frame At this setting the camera will take one photograph each time the shutter release button is pressed Release mode dial 4 Choose single point AF AF area mode selector Rotate the AF area mode selector until it clicks into place pointing to single point AF At this setting the user aa eo can choose the focus point I S 5 Choose single servo Focus mode autofocus selector A Rotate the focus mode selector until it clicks into place pointing to S single servo autofocus At this setting the camera will automatically focus on the subject in the selected focus point when the shutter release button is pressed halfway Pictures can only be taken when the camera is in focus 6 Choose matrix metering Metering selector Rotate the metering selector to matrix
249. ove select single point AF C J and rotate the focus mode selector to S then frame a high contrast subject in the center focus point and focus using autofocus With the camera in focus rotate the diopter control until the subject is clearly focused in the viewfinder If necessary viewfinder focus can be further adjusted using optional corrective lenses pg 366 43 Basic Photography and Playback Turn the Camera On Before taking photographs turn the camera on and check the battery level and number of exposures remaining as described below 1 Turn the camera on Turn the camera on The control panel will turn on and the display in the viewfinder will light Power switch WE OL 2 Check the battery level Check the battery level in the control Exon panel or viewfinder custo wA Icon Control panel Viewfinder Description am Battery fully charged aml im Battery partially discharged Cal Low battery Prepare to charge battery or ready spare battery Ca cA Shutter release disabled Charge or blinks blinks exchange battery No icon displayed when camera is powered by optional AC adapter 3 Check the number of exposures remaining p i5 56 um a je en The exposure count displays in the control panel and viewfinder show the number of phot
250. p menu the filter can be cleaned manually as described below Note however that the filter is extremely delicate and easily damaged Nikon recommends that the filter be cleaned only by Nikon authorized service personnel 1 Charge the battery or connect an AC adapter A reliable power source is required when inspecting or cleaning the low pass filter If the battery level is below 60 turn the camera off and insert a fully charged EN EL3e battery or connect an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter 2 Select Lock mirror up for cleaning tema Remove the lens and turn the camera on Highlight Lock mirror up for cleaning in the setup menu and press note that this option is not available at battery levels of or below 3 Press iy Lock mirror up for cleaning The message shown at right will be R n LM When shutter button is pressed displayed in the monitor and a row of w E i PE To lower mirror turn camera off dashes will appear in the control panel and viewfinder To restore normal operation without inspecting the low pass filter turn the camera off 376 4 Raise the mirror Press the shutter release button all the way down The mirror will be raised and the shutter curtain will open revealing the low pass filter The display in the viewfinder will turn off and the row of dashes in the control panel will blink 5 Examine the low pass filter Holding the camera so that
251. pe of bracketing performed Changes to bracketing settings can be made using the Fn button the default setting see Custom Setting f4 Assign FUNC button pg 302 the depth of field preview button Custom setting f5 Assign preview button pg 305 or the AE L AF L button Custom Setting f6 Assign AE L AF L button pg 306 Note that some button press options can not be combined with options using dials The explanation that follows assumes that bracketing is assigned to the Fn button EE Exposure and Flash Bracketing 1 Select flash or exposure bracketing PETEA Choose the type of bracketing to be aT performed using Custom Setting e5 lt ew A s Flashonly Auto bracketing set pg 297 Choose Pk AE amp flash to vary both exposure and flash level the default setting AE only to vary only exposure or Flash only to vary only flash level 2 Choose the number of shots Pressing the Fn button rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence The number of shots is shown in the control panel Number of shots Fn button Main command dial Exposure and flash bracketing indicator At settings other than zero a Hai icon SIZ and exposure and flash bracketing indicator will be displayed in the Is control panel and a 4 icon will blink in the viewfinder 117 118 3 Select an exposure in
252. pg 250 Standard and Vivid Picture Controls only Neutral Monochrome and custom Picture Controls Not displayed with monochrome Picture Controls Monochrome Picture Controls only EE Shooting Data Page 3 ACT D LIGHT RETOUCH 1 Protect Status secs 221 2 Retouch indicator 329 3 High ISO noise reduction 263 Long exposure noise redUCtiOn sssssssssssssessrsrssesrrrsssssese 262 4 Active D Lighting 0 eee 165 HI TSO NORM A NORMAL D LIGHT ING WARM FILTER CYANOTYPE TRIM SPRING HAS COME SP RING HAS COME 3636 5 Retouch history 6 Image comment 7 Camera name 8 Folder number frame number Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode pg 250 213 BE Shooting Data Page 4 NIKON TARO p COPYRIGHT NIKON i A 10071 5 6 1 Protect Status ccceseeeeeees 221 5 Cameraname 2 Retouch indicator 329 6 Folder number 3 Name of photographerv 324 frame NUMDEL 00 eeseeeesceseseeeeeeee 258 4 Copyright holder Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode pg 250 and copyright information was appended to photograph pg 324 214 EE GPS Data 2 fe 3 ns N 35 36 371 4 LONGITUDE lt E 139 43 696 5 r es 35m 6 _ Ae 15 12 2007 01 15 29 7 105 07 A 8 9 1 Protect Status 221 6 Coordinated Universal Time 2 Retouch indicator 329 UTC 3 Latitude 7 He
253. phy is in progress The monitor will turn off automatically about four seconds before each interval Shooting Menu Banks Changes to interval timer settings apply to all shooting menu banks pg 255 If shooting menu settings are reset using the Reset shooting menu item in the shooting menu pg 257 interval timer settings will be reset as follows e Choose start time Now Interval 00 01 00 Number of intervals 1 Number of shots 1 Start shooting Off 195 196 Non CPU Lenses By specifying lens data lens focal length and maximum aperture the user can gain access to a variety of CPU lens functions when using anon CPU lens If the focal length of the lens is known e Automatic power zoom can be used with SB 900 SB 800 and SB 600 Speedlights available separately e Lens focal length is listed with an asterisk in the playback photo info display When the maximum aperture of the lens is known e The aperture value is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder e Flash level is adjusted for changes in aperture e Aperture is listed with an asterisk in the playback photo info display Specifying both the focal length and maximum aperture of the lens e Enables color matrix metering note that it may be necessary to use center weighted or spot metering to achieve accurate results with some lenses including Reflex Nikkor lenses e Improves the precision of center weighted and spot metering and i TT
254. ping Colors True The color of light reflected from an object varies with the color of the light source The human brain is able to adapt to changes in the color of the light source with the result that white objects appear white whether seen in the shade direct sunlight or under incandescent lighting Unlike the film used in film cameras digital cameras can mimic this adjustment by processing images according to the color of the light source This is known as white balance This chapter covers white balance settings White Balance Options ssscscscsscsssececessecsscececees pg 126 Fine Tuning White Balance csscecssssscsesessssceeees pg 129 Choosing a Color Temperature cccsccssssesscsceeees pg 133 Presets Manua a e A AAE pg 134 125 126 White Balance Options For natural coloration choose a white balance setting that matches the light source before shooting The following options are available Color temp Option K Description White balance is adjusted automatically using color temperature measured by image Auto 3 500 sensor and 1 005 segment RGB AUTO default 8 000 Sensor For best results use type G f or D lens If built in or optional flash is used white balance reflects conditions in effect when the flash goes off gt amp Incandescent 3 000 Use under incandescent lighting S Fluorescent Use under following seven light source
255. r M Transfer Mode When Wireless transmitter gt Mode gt Transfer mode is selected in the camera setup menu the button is used during playback to select pictures for upload preventing it from being used to select pictures for other operations such as side by side comparison pg 342 To restore normal operation select another option for Wireless transmitter gt Mode WT 4A B C D E The principal difference between the WT 4 and WT 4A B C D E is in the number of channels supported unless otherwise stated all references to the WT 4 also apply to the WT 4A B C D E 229 Printing Photographs Photographs can be printed by any of the following methods Connect the camera to a printer and print JPEG photographs directly from the camera pg 231 Insert the camera memory card in a printer equipped with a card slot see the printer manual for details If the printer supports DPOF pg 416 photographs can be selected for printing using Print set DPOF pg 240 e Take the camera memory card to a developer or digital printer center If the center supports DPOF pg 416 photographs can be selected for printing using Print set DPOF pg 240 Print JPEG photographs on a printer connected to a network computer using the WT 4 wireless transmitter available separately see the WT 4 user s manual for details e Transfer pictures pg 224 and print them from a computer using ViewNxX version 1 2 0 or la
256. r the lens Small apertures high f numbers increase depth of field see page 103 bringing both foreground and background into focus Large apertures low f numbers soften background details in portraits or other compositions that emphasize the main subject L SHOOT LN C a Small aperture f 36 ade aperture f 2 8 107 108 3 Framea photograph focus and shoot Non CPU Lenses If the maximum aperture of the lens has been specified using the Non CPU lens data item in setup menu pg 197 when a non CPU lens is on attached the current f number will be displayed Jaa in the viewfinder and control panel rounded to the nearest full stop Otherwise the aperture displays will show only the number of stops 4AF with maximum aperture displayed as 4FG and the f number must be read from the lens aperture ring M Manual In manual exposure mode you control both shutter speed and aperture To take photographs in manual exposure mode 1 Select exposure mode Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial until 4 is displayed in the viewfinder and control panel MODE button Main command dial 109 110 2 Choose aperture and shutter speed Rotate the main command dial to choose a shutter speed and the sub command dial to set aperture Shutter speed can be set x 25a or to values between 30 s and 1 8 000 s
257. ra For information on using the retouch menu see Tutorial Camera Menus pg 24 Option See page ER D lighting 334 Red eye correction 335 Trim 336 Monochrome 337 Q Filter effects 338 oY Color balance 338 sh Image overlay 339 mO Side by side comparison 342 Not available with photographs taken with Monochrome selected for Set Picture Control pg 148 329 Creating Retouched Copies Except in the case of Image overlay pg 339 and Side by side comparison pg 342 the photographs to be retouched can be selected in full frame playback as well as from the retouch menu EH Creating Retouched Copies in Full Frame Playback 1 Choosea picture Display the desired picture in full frame playback pg 204 2 Display the retouch menu OS D Red eye correction i X Trim Press to display the retouch e menu Q Filter effects oF Color balance Cancel 3 Select retouch options Highlight the desired item in ESSN mei the retouch menu and press gt gt O to display retouch options for more information see the section for the selected item on the following pages To return to full frame playback without creating a retouched copy press PJ See Also See page 229 for information on using the button with the WT 4 wireless transmitter 330 4 Create a retouched copy Press to create a retouched copy Retouched c
258. ra is in focus focus priority or whenever the shutter release button is pressed release priority in single servo AF To select single servo AF rotate the focus mode selector to S Option Description Release Photos can be taken whenever the shutter release button is pressed Eng Focus default Photos can only be taken when the in focus indicator is displayed Regardless of the option selected focus will lock while the in focus indicator is displayed a3 Dynamic AF Area If the subject leaves the selected focus point when dynamic area AF t pg 64 is selected in continuous servo AF focus mode C pg 62 the camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus points Choose the number of focus points from 9 21 and 51 based on subject movement Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder Remaining focus points provide information to assist focus operation Option Description If the subject leaves the selected focus point the pjg 9 Points camera will focus based on information from the default surrounding eight focus points Choose when there is time to compose the photograph or when photographing subjects that are moving predictably e g runners or race cars on a track 3 21 21 points If the subject leaves the selected focus point the camera will focus based on information from the surrounding 20 f
259. ram off Flash oft Exposure off compensation compensation FV lock Off AE hold Off Multiple exposure Off 1 Custom Setting f6 Assign AE L AF L button pg 306 is unaffected al 2 Number of shots is reset to zero Bracketing increment is reset to 1EV exposure flash bracketing or 1 white balance bracketing The following shooting menu options will also be reset Only settings in the bank currently selected using the Shooting menu bank option will be reset pg 255 Settings in the remaining banks are unaffected Option Default Option Default Image quality JPEG Normal White balance Auto Image size Large ISO sensitivity 200 Fine tuning off If the current Picture Control has been modified existing settings for the Picture Control will also be restored See Also See page 400 for a list of default settings 183 184 Multiple Exposure Follow the steps below to record a series of two to ten exposures in a single photograph Multiple exposures can be recorded at any image quality setting and produce results with colors noticeably better than photographs combined in an imaging application because they make use of RAW data from the camera image sensor BE Creating a Multiple Exposure Note that at default settings shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be recorded automatically if no operations are performed for 30 s 1 Select Multiple exposure SHOOTING MENU g Color space
260. ratures This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction 11 12 The Shooting Information Display Shooting information including shutter speed aperture the number of exposures remaining buffer capacity and AF area mode is displayed in the monitor when the ff button is pressed To clear shooting information from the monitor press the MA button again or press the shutter release button halfway At default settings the monitor will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for about 20 seconds E button ian 56 7 prama 21 22 2324 25 26 3 fos OW a y ED 17 16 15 14 13 12 See Also For information on choosing how long the monitor stays on see Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay pg 280 For information on changing the color of the lettering in the shooting information display see Custom Setting d7 Shooting info display pg 284 1 Exposure MOE ceecssssessccceseteceeenees 102 2 Flexible program indicator 105 3 Flash sync indicator 4 Shutter speed Exposure compensation value 114 Flash compensation value 176 Number of shots in exposure and flash bracketing sequence 117 Number of shots in WB bracketing sequence Focal length non CPU lenses 198 Color temperature eccccssescceeesee 133 Color temperature indicatov 133 a wu Aperture stop indicator
261. re can be fine tuned separately for each Custom Settings bank and is not affected by two button resets Note that as the exposure compensation 4 icon is not displayed the only way to determine how much exposure has been altered is to view the amount in the fine tuning menu Exposure compensation pg 114 is preferred in most situations 278 c Timers AE Lock c1 Shutter Release Button AE L At the default setting of Off exposure only locks when the AE L AF L button is pressed If On is selected exposure will also lock when the shutter release button is pressed halfway c2 Auto Meter off Delay This option controls how long the camera Option continues to meter exposure when no 4s 4s operations are performed Choose from 4 s 6s 6s default 6s 8s 165s 305s 1 minute 5 minutes Dgs 8s 10 minutes 30 minutes or until the camerais 16s 16s turned off No limit The shutter speed and 380s 30s aperture displays in the control panel and in 1 min viewfinder turn off automatically when the Sdn 5 min exposure meters turn off Din 10 min Dm 30 min co No limit Choose a shorter meter off delay for longer battery life When the camera is powered by an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter the auto meter off delay is equivalent to No limit 279 c3 Self Timer Delay This option controls the length of the shutter release delay in self timer mode Choose from 2s 5s 10s and 20s
262. regular intervals To prevent mold or mildew take the camera out of storage at least once a month Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before putting it away Store the battery in a cool dry place Replace the terminal cover before putting the battery away Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source Do not unplug the product or remove the battery while the product is on or while images are being recorded or deleted Forcibly cutting power in these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product memory or internal circuitry To prevent an accidental interruption of power avoid carrying the product from one location to another while the AC adapter is connected Notes on the monitor The monitor may contain a few pixels that are always lit or that do not light This is common to all TFT LCD monitors and does not indicate a malfunction Images recorded with the product are unaffected Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light Do not apply pressure to the monitor as this could cause damage or malfunction Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather Should the monitor break care should be taken to avoid injury from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering the eyes and mouth Replace the monit
263. ress the shutter release button all the way down The mirror will be raised and the view through the lens will be displayed in the camera monitor The subject will no longer be visible in the viewfinder To exit without taking a picture rotate the release mode dial to another setting or press MENU EEE Pi2S S6 2005471 6 Focus Autofocus focus mode S or C In tripod mode the focus point for contrast detect autofocus can be moved to any point in the frame using the multi selector Contrast detect AF point To focus using contrast detect AF ON button autofocus press the AF 0N button The focus point will blink green and the monitor may brighten while the camera focuses If the camera is able to focus using contrast detect autofocus the focus point will be displayed in green if the camera is unable to focus the focus point will blink red 1 Contrast Detect Autofocus The camera will not continue to adjust focus while the AF ON button is pressed in continuous servo autofocus mode In both single servo and continuous servo autofocus modes the shutter can be released even when the camera is not in focus Manual focus focus mode M pg 71 Use zoom for precise focus To magnify the view in the monitor up to 13 x and check focus press the amp button While the view through the lens is zoomed in a navigation window will appear in the bottom
264. rives 409 410 Storage File system DCF Design Rule for Camera File System 2 0 DPOF Digital Print Order Format Exif 2 21 Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras PictBridge Viewfinder Viewfinder Eye level pentaprism single lens reflex viewfinder Frame coverage Approx 100 horizontal and 100 vertical Magnification Approx 0 94 x 50 mm f 1 4 lens at infinity 1 0 m Eyepoint 19 5 mm 1 0 m Diopter adjustment 2 1 m7 Focusing screen Ships with type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark II screen with AF area brackets framing grid can be displayed Reflex mirror Quick return Depth of field preview When depth of field preview button is pressed lens aperture is stopped down to value selected by user A and M modes or by camera P and S modes Lens aperture Instant return electronically controlled Lens Compatible lenses DX AF Nikkor All functions supported Type Gor D AF Nikkor All functions supported PC Micro Nikkor does not support some functions IX Nikkor lenses not supported Other AF Nikkor All functions supported except 3D color matrix metering II Lenses for F3AF not supported Al P Nikkor All functions supported except 3D color matrix metering II Non CPU Can be used in exposure modes A and M electronic rangefinder can be used if maximum aperture is f 5 6 or faster color matrix meteri
265. rrect option is selected for the USB item in the camera setup menu pg 225 2 Turn the camera off Power switch en Turn the computer on Turn the computer on and wait for it to start up Connect the USB cable Connect the USB cable as shown Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle 1 USB Hubs Connect the camera directly to the computer do not connect the cable via a USB hub or keyboard 5 Turn the camera on Power switch If Mass Storage is selected for USB pg 225 FE will be displayed in the control panel and viewfinder and the PC connection indicator will flash in the control panel camera displays do not change if MTP PTP is selected 6 Transfer photographs Transfer photographs to the computer as described in the online help for Nikon Transfer To view the online help start Nikon Transfer and select Nikon Transfer help from the Nikon Transfer Help menu vV During Transfer Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress 227 228 7 Turn the camera off If MTP PTP is selected for USB the camera can be turned off and the USB cable disconnected once transfer is complete If Mass Storage is selected the camera must first be removed from th
266. ry card is inserted in the camera Note that when photographs are being captured to a computer using Camera Control Pro 2 available separately photographs are not recorded to the camera memory card and the shutter will be enabled regardless of the setting chosen for this option 309 310 10 Reverse Indicators At the default setting Of het ininnisinte 07 the exposure indicators in the control panel viewfinder and shooting information display are displayed with positive values on the left and negative values on the right Select gi iiQininteh 70 to display negative values on the left and positive values on the right T The Setup Menu Camera Setup The setup menu contains the options listed below For information on using the setup menu see Tutorial Camera Menus pg 24 Option See page Format memory card 312 LCD brightness 312 Clean image sensor 373 Lock mirror up for cleaning 376 Video mode 313 HDMI 314 World time 315 Language 315 Image comment 316 Auto image rotation 317 USB 318 Dust off ref photo 318 Battery info 321 Wireless transmitter 2 229 Image authentication 323 Copyright information 324 Save load settings 325 GPS 202 Non CPU lens data 197 AF fine tune 327 Firmware version 328 1 Not available when battery is low 2 Only available when optional WT 4 wireless transmitter is connected and MTP PTP selected for USB
267. ry warning is displayed in the viewfinder Option Description On default A low battery lt a icon is displayed when the battery is low Off Low battery warning is not displayed in the viewfinder d4 CL Mode Shooting Speed This option determines the maximum frame advance rate in CL continuous low speed mode during interval timer photography this setting also determines the frame advance rate for single frame mode Choose from values between one and seven frames per second fps the default setting is 3 fps Note that the frame advance rate may drop below the selected value at slow shutter speeds and that the maximum frame rate without the optional MB D10 battery pack is 6 fps d5 Max Continuous Release The maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single burst in continuous mode can be set to any value between 1 and 100 The Memory Buffer Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d5 shooting will slow when the memory buffer fills See page 405 for more information on the capacity of the memory buffer d6 File Number Sequence When a photograph is taken the camera names the file by adding one to the last file number used This option controls whether file numbering continues from the last number used when a new folder is created the memory card is formatted or a new memory card is inserted in the camera Option Description When a new folder is created the memory card form
268. s Sodium vapor lamps 2 700 Use under sodium vapor lighting found in sports venues Warm white Use under warm white fluorescent 3 000 fluorescent lights White fluorescent 3 700 Use under white fluorescent lights Cool white fluorescent 4 200 Use under cool white fluorescent lights Day white fluorescent 5 000 Use nder daylight white fluorescent lights Daylight fluorescent 6 500 Use under daylight fluorescent lights Use under high color temperature High temp mercury ge IR vanes 7 200 light sources e g mercury vapor P lamps 3 Direct sunlight 5 200 Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight Color temp Option K Description 4 Flash 5 400 Use with built in or optional flash Cloudy 6 000 Use in daylight under overcast skies fs Shade 8 000 Use in daylight with subjects in the shade 2 500 Choose color temperature from list 10 000 of values pg 133 Use subject light source or existing PRE Preset manual photograph as reference for white balance pg 134 All values are approximate Fine tuning set to 0 Auto white balance is recommended with most light sources If the desired results can not be achieved with auto white balance choose an option from the list above or use preset white balance I Choose color temp White balance can be selected by pressing the WB button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is displ
269. s issued by the government and of certified documents stipulated by law is prohibited e Cautions on certain copies and reproductions The government has issued cautions on copies or reproductions of securities issued by private companies shares bills checks gift certificates etc commuter passes or coupon tickets except when a minimum of necessary copies are to be provided for business use by a company Also do not copy or reproduce passports issued by the government licenses issued by public agencies and private groups ID cards and tickets such as passes and meal coupons Comply with copyright notices The copying or reproduction of copyrighted creative works such as books music paintings woodcuts prints maps drawings movies and photographs is governed by national and international copyright laws Do not use this product for the purpose of making illegal copies or to infringe copyright laws Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex electronic circuitry Only Nikon brand electronic accessories including battery chargers batteries AC adapters and flash accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic circuitry The use of non Nikon electronic accessories could damage the camera and may void your Nik
270. s and hold Preview button the depth of field preview button The lens will be stopped down to the aperture value selected by the camera modes F and 5 or the value chosen by the user modes f and 4 allowing depth of field to be previewed in the viewfinder Custom Setting e4 Modeling Flash This setting controls whether the built in flash and the SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB R200 and other optional flash units that support the Creative Lighting System CLS see page 357 will emit a modeling flash when the depth of field preview button is pressed See page 297 for more information See Also See page 96 for information on auto ISO sensitivity control For information on using the Long exp NR option in the shooting menu for reducing noise at slow shutter speeds see page 262 For information on choosing the size of the increments available for shutter speed and aperture see Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl pg 275 For information on changing the roles of the main and sub command dials see Custom Setting f7 Customize command dials gt Change main sub pg 307 103 F Programmed Auto In this mode the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture according to a built in program to ensure optimal exposure in most situations This mode is recommended for snapshots and other situations in which you want to leave the camera in charge of shutter speed and aperture To take
271. s created at image quality settings of NEF RAW or TIFF RGB pg 56 can not be selected for printing See Also See page 397 for information on what to do if an error occurs during printing 235 236 Printing Multiple Pictures 1 Display the PictBridge menu A fO Setup Press the MENU button in the PictBridge playback display see Step 4 on page 232 2 Choose Print select or Print DPOF Highlight one of the following CAD Print DPOF options and press gt E J Index print e Printselect Select pictures for printing e Print DPOF Print an existing print order created with the Print set DPOF option in the playback menu pg 240 The current print order will be displayed in Step 3 To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card select Index print See page 239 for more information 3 Select pictures Use the multi selector to scroll through the pictures on the memory card To display the current picture full screen press amp button To select the current picture for printing press the O n button and press A The picture will be marked with a G icon and the number of prints will be set to 1 Keeping the O n button pressed press A or W to specify the number of prints up to 99 to deselect the picture press W when the number of prints is 1 Continue until all the desired pictures have been selected
272. s created with Cannot select not contain images f other devices can not 330 this file that can be be retouched retouched Check printer To resume select Check printer Printer error Continue if 231 available ee _ Insert paper of Check paper L pEaperin printer 9 correctsizeandselect 231 not of selected size Continue Paperjam _ Paper is jammed in Clear jam and select 331 printer Continue Insert paper of Out of paper Printeris OUEDE selected size and 231 paper select Continue 397 Indicator Control Monitor panel Problem Solution Page Check ink To pe ink Ink error resume select 231 pply Continue Out of ink Printeris out of ink Replace inkand select 231 Continue See printer manual for more information 398 Appendix The Appendix covers the following topics Defaults sieisen raisata aiaee iaae ae nastati iiin e Memory Card Capacity e Exposure Program essssssssssssssessesessessessssesese e Aperture Sensitivity and Flash Range sssssssseccseccseeeessees 399 Defaults The following defaults are restored either with a two button reset or using Reset shooting menu or Reset custom settings BE Defaults Restored with a Two Button Reset pg 182 Option Default ISO sensitivity pg 94 200 Image quality
273. s mode is recommended for most situations In programmed auto and aperture priority auto modes shutter speed will automatically be set to values between 1 250 and 1 eo s 8 000 to 1 60 s when an optional flash unit is used with Auto FP High Speed Sync pg 357 2 Red eye reduction Red eye reduction lamp lights for approximately one second before main flash Pupils in subject s eyes to contract reducing red eye effect sometimes caused by flash Owing to one second shutter release delay this mode is not recommended with moving subjects or in other situations in which quick shutter response is required Avoid moving camera while red eye reduction lamp is lit Red eye reduction with slow sync Combines red eye reduction with slow sync Use for portraits taken against a backdrop of night scenery Available only in programmed auto and aperture priority auto exposure modes Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blurring caused by camera shake Slow sync Flash is combined with shutter speeds as slow as 30 s to capture both subject and background at night or under dim light This mode is only available in programmed auto and aperture priority auto exposure modes Use of tripod is recommended to prevent blurring caused by camera shake 174 Flash mode Description In shutter priority auto or manual exposure mode flash fires just before SLOW 4 Rear curtain sync the shutter closes Us
274. s point contains objects at different distances from the camera Example subject is inside a cage The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns Example a row of windows in a skyscraper The focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness Example subject is half in the shade Background objects appear larger than the subject Example a building is in the frame behind the subject The subject contains many fine details Example a field of flowers or other subjects that are small or lack variation in brightness Manual Focus Manual focus is available for Focus mode lenses that do not support selector autofocus non AF Nikkor lenses or when the autofocus does not produce the desired results pg 70 To focus manually set the focus mode selector to M and adjust the lens focusing ring until the image displayed on the clear matte field in the viewfinder is in focus Photographs can be taken at any time even when the image is not in focus A M Selection Autofocus with Manual Priority If the lens supports A M selection set the lens A M switch to M manual If the lens supports M A autofocus with manual override MF priority or A M autofocus with manual override AF priority focus can be adjusted manually regardless of the mode selected with the lens See the documentation provided with your lens for details 71 72 The Electronic Rangefinder If the lens has a
275. s the options listed below For information on using the shooting menu see Tutorial Camera Menus pg 24 Shooting menu bank 255 Reset shooting menu 257 Active folder 258 File naming 260 Image quality 56 Image size 60 JPEG compression 58 NEF RAW recording 58 White balance 126 Set Picture Control 146 Manage Picture Control 154 Color space 167 Active D Lighting 165 Long exp NR 262 High ISO NR 263 ISO sensitivity settings 94 Live view 79 Multiple exposure 184 Interval timer shooting 189 254 Shooting Menu Bank Shooting menu options are stored in one of four banks With the exceptions of Interval timer shooting Multiple exposure and modifications to Picture Controls quick adjust and other manual adjustments changes to settings in one bank have no effect on the others To store a particular combination of frequently used settings select one of the four banks and set the camera to these settings The new settings will be stored in the bank even when the camera is turned off and will be restored the next time the bank is selected Different combinations of settings can be stored in the other banks allowing the user to switch instantly from one combination to another by selecting the appropriate bank from the bank menu The default names for the four shooting menu banks are A B C and D A descriptive caption can be added using the Rename option as de
276. s to the command dials for the MB D10 At the default setting of Off the main command dial controls shutter speed and the sub command dial controls Change aperture If On is selected the main command dial will main sub control aperture and the sub command dial shutter speed This setting also applies to the command dials for the MB D10 At the default setting of Sub command dial aperture can only be adjusted with the sub command dial or with the main command dial if On is selected for Change main sub If Aperture ring is selected aperture can only be adjusted with the lens aperture ring and the camera aperture Aperture eh setting display will show aperture in increments of 1 EV aperture for type G lenses is still set using the sub command dial Live view is not available when Aperture ring is selected and a CPU lens with an aperture ring is attached Note that regardless of the setting chosen the aperture ring must be used to adjust aperture when a non CPU lens is attached 307 308 Option Description At the default setting of Off the multi selector is used to choose the picture displayed during full frame playback highlight thumbnails and navigate menus If On is selected the main command dial can be used to choose the picture displayed during full frame playback move the cursor left or right during thumbnail playback and move the menu Menus highlight bar up or down The sub comman
277. scribed below Shooting Menu Bank The control panel and shooting information displays show the current shooting menu bank BE Renaming Shooting Menu Banks Selecting Rename in the Shooting menu bank menu displays the list of shooting menu banks shown in Step 1 T Select a bank Shooting menu bank O Rename Highlight the desired bank and press P f IE E o 255 2 Entera name Keyboard area 256 E Shooting menu balik To move the cursor in the n name area press the amp E1 o ER button and press lt or gt To f AW UNOGORSTUVHXYZI enter a new letter at the Ji current cursor position use the Xv Glnost_ OWK multi selector to highlight the Name area desired character in the keyboard area and press the center of the multi selector To delete the character at the current cursor position press the 1 button To return to the shooting menu without changing the bank name press the MENU button Bank names can be up to twenty characters long Any characters after the twentieth will be deleted Save changes and exit After editing the name press to save changes and exit button The Shooting menu bank menu will be pemi displayed Reset Shooting Menu Choose whether to restore default settings for the current shooting menu bank See page 401 for a list of default settings With the exceptions of image quality image size white balance and ISO sensi
278. se to ensure that the desired focus can be achieved Magnifying Eyepiece DK 21M The DK 21M magnifies the view through the viewfinder by approximately 1 1 x 50 mm f 1 4 lens at infinity 1 0 m for greater precision when framing Magnifier DG 2 The DG 2 magnifies the scene displayed in the viewfinder Use for close up photography copying telephoto lenses and other tasks that call for added precision DK 22 eyepiece adapter available separately required Eyepiece Adapter DK 22 The DK 22 is used when attaching the DG 2 magnifier to the D300 Right Angle Viewing Attachment DR 6 The DR 6 attaches to the viewfinder eyepiece at a right angle allowing the image in the viewfinder to be viewed from above when the camera is in the horizontal shooting position Filters Nikon filters can be divided into three types screw in slip in and rear interchange Use Nikon filters filters manufactured by other makers may interfere with autofocus or electronic range finding The D300 can not be used with linear polarizing filters Use the C PL circular polarizing filter instead Use NC and L37C filters to protect the lens To prevent moir use of a filter is not recommended when the subject is framed against a bright light or when a bright light source is in the frame Center weighted metering is recommended with filters with exposure factors filter factors over 1x Y44 Y48 Y52 056 R60 XO X1 C PL ND2S ND4 ND4S ND
279. selected Note that print quality may drop if small crops are printed at large sizes See Also See page 397 for information on what to do if an error occurs during printing 238 BE Creating Index Prints To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card select Index print in Step 2 of Printing Multiple Pictures pg 236 Note that if the memory card contains more than 256 pictures only the first 256 images will be printed 1 Select Index print a PictBridoe Highlight Index print in the l Print select PictBridge menu pg 236 and ed press gt L yA The confirmation dialog shown at right jm will be displayed be 4 Aa Print Display printing options Press to display PictBridge printing options Adjust printing options w Stw Choose page size border and time oe stamp options as described on page 238 a warning will be displayed if the ve selected page size is too small Start printing 4 I Highlight Start printing and press to el start printing To cancel before printing is complete press 239 240 EE Creating a DPOF Print Order Print Set The Print set DPOF option in the playback menu is used to create digital print orders for PictBridge compatible printers and devices that support DPOF Selecting Print set DPOF from the playback menu displays the menu shown in Step 1 1 Choose Select set ins Print set
280. selects the aperture that will produce the optimal exposure To take photographs in shutter priority auto 1 Select exposure mode MODE button 5 Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial until 5 is displayed in the viewfinder and control panel Main command dial 2 Choose a shutter speed Rotate the main command dial to choose the desired shutter speed Shutter speed can be set to x 25a or to values between 30s 3a and 1 8 000 s aaa Use slow shutter speeds to suggest motion by blurring moving objects high shutter speeds to freeze motion a Fast shutter speed 1 1 600 Slow shutter speed 1 6 s 3 Framea photograph focus and shoot See Also See page 393 for information on what to do if flashing kus amp indicator appears in the shutter speed displays Ai Aperture Priority Auto In aperture priority auto you choose the aperture while the camera automatically selects the shutter speed that will produce the optimal exposure To take photographs in aperture priority auto 1 Select exposure MODE button mode Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial until Ais displayed in the viewfinder and control Main command dial panel 2 Choose an aperture Rotate the sub command dial to choose the desired aperture from values between the minimum Sub command dial and maximum fo
281. seseessseess 290 e3 Flash Cntrl for Built in Flash eessssescccsescesseccenseees 291 e4 Modeling Flash a e5 Auto Bracketing Set ssssscsssesccsssecssssscccsseesssseeessneecseneees 297 e6 Auto Bracketing Mode M ssscssssssccssescesseecesseeeceeeeees 298 XV e7 Bracketing Order sessssscsssescssssecssnsccesecsssseecesneesesneeesse 299 Fe COMPOS ass sgecetea ccneectetectesacessteasadiasneticcasssttetebescosasssstiensecnstiteke 300 f1 Multi Selector Center Button wo eeceessesssessessseeseesseees 300 f2 Multi SelectOr s ssessssss0000000000 f3 Photo Info Playback f4 Assign FUNC Button 5 Assign Preview Button ssecsssssccssecssssececsseceesstecesneeesens 305 f6 Assign AE L AF L Button sssssesssccsssessseessssesessnsseessees 306 f7 Customize Command Dials cescsesseesseessesssesssesseesseees 307 f8 Release Button to Use Dial ceesssssssessesssesssesssesseeeee 308 f9 No Memory Card 00 309 f10 Reverse Indicators Y The Setup Menu Camera Setupa cscssccsssssssssscsssssssseessssees 311 Format Memory Card u ssssscsssesscsseecsssscccssecessseeecsneeessneeesaee 312 LCD Brightness lt i Clean Image SQNSOL sssscssssscccssescessesccssescesnsecesneesssneeessneeees 313 Lock Mirror Up for Cleaning ssssccsssecsssescecseccsseeecesneeesene 313 Vide Mod vecccccsssscsscrnntscecpunassespeenusssacetniasensenstseebensvansesebonassconed 313
282. shooting Off default Pictures can only be displayed by pressing P button After Delete Choose the picture displayed after an image is deleted Option Description default Show next Display following picture If deleted picture was last frame previous picture will be displayed Show lV Display previous picture If deleted picture was first previous frame following picture will be displayed If user was scrolling through pictures in order recorded following picture will be displayed as Si CONtinue described for Show next If user was scrolling as before gt 3 through pictures in reverse order previous picture will be displayed as described for Show previous Rotate Tall Choose whether to rotate tall portrait orientation pictures for display during playback Note that because the camera itself is already in the appropriate orientation during shooting images are not rotated automatically during image review pg 205 Option Description Tall portrait orientation pictures are automatically On rotated for display in the camera monitor Pictures taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation pg 317 will be displayed in wide landscape orientation Off Tall portrait orientation pictures are displayed in default wide landscape orientation 251 Slide Show Create a slide show of the pictures i
283. sssscosyusadesccstcsecteanaccrnessctesnvasasccsetusterione 373 Clean at Startup Shutdown ceesccssseccsseesesseeccsneeessneeees 374 Manual Clearing ssssccsssescsseesesssecsssseccssecsssssecesseesssnsecesneees 376 Caring for the Camera and Battery Cautions ecsnseeesneees 379 Troubleshooting esssseescsnssecessseecensccesssscssnssecsnssceesssseecnsseeesunsessnsees 383 Err r Messages scccissisescccsatceccusssncasseadeascecssiasasoedsac ssis uatsocisedensssasacsondens 391 AD BOR T EE E E resid nhdedaccepeeotctoeets 399 SPECIFICATIONS secccssessssscstisseccstsacccssina uasracsttectetiaacasdaacanncacieuaecscnanaanndecs 409 ine ES E EAEE A EE 419 xvii For Your Safety To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others read the following safety precautions in their entirety before using this equipment Keep these safety instructions where all those who use the product will read them The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol A This icon marks warnings To prevent possible injury read all warnings before using this Nikon product BE WARNINGS A Keep the sun out of the frame A Tum off immediately in the event of Keep the sun well out of the frame when shooting backlit subjects Sunlight focused into the camera when the sun is in or close to the frame could cause a f
284. st sharpening automatically according to the type of scene or choose from values between 0 no sharpening and 9 the higher the value the greater the sharpening Contrast s101 u0 a4N DI IlL s u wzsnfpe jenuey Select A to adjust contrast automatically according to the type of scene or choose from values between 3 and 3 choose lower values to prevent highlights in portrait subjects from being washed out in direct sunlight higher values to preserve detail in misty landscapes and other low contrast subjects Brightness Choose 1 for reduced brightness 1 for enhanced Saturation brightness Does not affect exposure Control the vividness of colors Select A to adjust saturation automatically according to the type of scene or choose from values between 3 and 3 lower values reduce saturation and higher values increase it Hue Ajuo woypouow uou s u wuzsnfpe jenuew Choose negative values to a minimum of 3 to make reds more purple blues more green and greens more yellow positive values up to 3 to make reds more orange greens more blue and blues more purple Filter effects Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs Choose from Off the default setting yellow orange red and green pg 153 Toning Ajuo wopouow syuawjsn pe jenuew Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs from B amp W black
285. stecssacecsecccccsccsccscetescorensccarecceteers pg 89 MirrorUp MO iiircssctece cccesecsecsccsssseerscsececsesssecsecsccesesereese pg 91 73 Choosing a Release Mode The camera supports the following release modes Mode Description S Camera takes one photograph each time shutter release Single frame button is pressed CL While shutter release button is held down camera records Continuous 1 6 frames per second Frame rate can be chosen using low speed Custom Setting d4 CL mode shooting speed pg 76 ch While shutter release button is held down camera records Continuous high speed 74 up to 6 frames per second Frame pictures in monitor pg 79 Recommended at high or low angles or in other situations in which viewfinder is Live view hard to use or when enlarged view in monitor can assist in obtaining very precise focus Use self timer for self portraits or to reduce blurring caused Self timer by camera shake pg 89 Choose this mode to minimize camera shake in telephoto Mup or close up photography or in other situations in which the Mirror up slightest camera movement can result in blurred photographs pg 91 1 Average frame rate with an EN EL3e battery continuous servo AF manual or shutter priority auto exposure a shutter speed of 250 s or faster remaining settings other than Custom Setting d4 at default values and memory remaining in memory buffer 2 Averag
286. t to select an item A or to change Press when the clock is set to the current date and time 37 38 8 Set date format World time Date format Press A or W to choose the a A WI t YD Year month day order in which the year month E WOY Month day year LT Day month year and day will be displayed and press 9 Exitto shooting mode Press the shutter release button halfway to exit to shooting mode The Clock Battery The camera clock is powered by an independent rechargeable power source which is charged as necessary when the main battery is installed or the camera is powered by an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter pg 365 Two days of charging will power the clock for about three months If the icon flashes in the control panel the clock battery is exhausted and the clock has been reset Set the clock to the correct time and date The Camera Clock The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household clocks Check the clock regularly against more accurate time pieces and reset as necessary Insert a Memory Card The camera stores photographs on CompactFlash and microdrive memory cards available separately pg 371 The following section describes how to insert and format a memory card T1 Turn the camera off Power switch Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing memory cards 2 Open the card s
287. t on Exif compliant printers PictBridge A standard developed through cooperation with the digital camera and printer industries allowing photographs to be output directly to a printer without first transferring them to a computer HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV devices capable of transmitting audiovisual data and control signals to HDMI compliant devices via a single cable connection the camera uses a type A connector Battery Life The number of shots that can be taken with fully charged batteries varies with the condition of the battery temperature and how the camera is used In the case of AA batteries capacity also varies with make and storage conditions some batteries can not be used Sample figures for the camera and optional MB D10 multi power battery pack are given below CIPA standard One EN EL3e battery camera Approximately 1000 shots One EN EL3e battery MB D10 Approximately 1000 shots One EN EL4a battery MB D10 Approximately 2000 shots Two EN EL3e batteries MB D10 Approximately 2000 shots One EN EL3e and one EN EL4a battery MB D10 Approximately 3000 shots Eight AA batteries MB D10 Approximately 1000 shots e Nikon standard 2 One EN EL3e battery camera Approximately 3000 shots One EN EL3e battery MB D10 Approximately 3000 shots One EN EL4a battery MB D10 Approximately 5900 shots Two EN EL3e batteries
288. t prior notice Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain MH 18a quick charger Rated input AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz Rated output DC 8 4 V 900 mA Supported batteries Nikon EN EL3e rechargeable Li ion battery Charging time Approx 2 hours and 15 minutes when battery is fully discharged Operating temperature 0 40 C 32 104 F Dimensions Wx H x D Approx 90 x 35 x 58 mm 3 5 x 1 4 x 2 3 in Length of cord Approx 1800 mm 5 ft 11 in Weight Approx 80 g 2 8 oz excluding power cable EN EL3e rechargeable Li ion battery Type Rechargeable lithium ion battery Rated capacity 7 4V 1500 mAh Dimensions Wx H x D Approx 39 5 x 56 x 21 mm 1 6 x 2 2 x 0 8 in Weight Approx 80 g 2 8 oz excluding terminal cover 415 416 Supported Standards DCF Version 2 0 The Design Rule for Camera File System DCF is a standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure compatibility among different makes of camera DPOF Digital Print Order Format DPOF is an industry wide standard that allows pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the memory card Exif version 2 21 The camera supports Exif Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras version 2 21 a standard in which information stored with photographs is used for optimal color reproduction when the images are outpu
289. t will be a No of copies displayed Press A or to No of choose number of copies copies maximum 99 then press to select and return to previous menu Menu shown at right will be a Border displayed Press A or to choose print style from Printer default default for current Print with border printer Print with border print No border photo with white border or No border then press to select and return to previous menu 1Printer default Border Menu shown at right will be a Time stamp displayed Press A or W to choose Printer default default Time for current printer Print time Print time stamp stamp stamp print time and date of recording on photo or No time stamp then press to select and return to previous menu 1Printer default No time stamp 234 Option Description Menu shown at right will be a Growing displayed To exit without cropping picture highlight No cropping and press To crop picture highlight Crop and press gt No cropping Croppin pping If Crop is selected dialog a Cropping shown at right will be displayed Press amp to increase size of crop QJ to decrease Choose position of crop using multi selector and press 4 start printing Select Start printing and press to start printing To cancel before all copies have been printed press Bunel m Selecting Photographs for Printing Image
290. tain Be sure to copy any photographs and other data you wish to keep to a computer before proceeding pg 224 1 Turn the camera on Power switch 2 Press the saa buttons Hold the wm MODE and tt buttons down simultaneously for more than two seconds A blinking F a r will appear in the shutter speed displays in the control panel and viewfinder To exit without formatting the memory card press any button other than the saa MODE and ft buttons See Also See page 312 for information on formatting memory cards using the Format memory card option in the setup menu 41 42 3 Press the buttons again Press the MODE and it buttons together a second time to format the memory card Do not remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source during formatting When formatting is complete the p 5 5 control panel and viewfinder willshow fi the number of photographs that can a7 jen l be recorded at current settings Eyl m Memory Cards e Memory cards may be hot after use Observe due caution when removing memory cards from the camera Memory cards that have been formatted in a computer or other device must be reformatted in the camera before they can be used for recording or playback Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards Do not remove memory cards from the camera turn the camera off or remove or d
291. ter or other compatible software such as Capture NX version 1 3 5 or later or Capture NX 2 version 2 1 0 or later available separately pg 368 Note that this is the only method available for printing RAW NEF pictures TIFF Photographs TIFF photographs can be printed from a computer Some digital print services may also support TIFF check with the service before ordering 230 Direct USB Connection If the camera is connected to a PictBridge printer via the supplied USB cable selected JPEG pictures can be printed directly from the camera Take photographs Select photographs for printing using Print set DPOF pg 240 Select MTP PTP in camera USB menu and connect camera to printer pg 232 Print photographs Print multiple one ata time photographs pg 233 pg 236 Create index prints pg 239 Disconnect USB cable M USB Hubs Connect the camera directly to the computer do not connect the cable via a USB hub or keyboard Printing Via Direct USB Connection Be sure the battery is fully charged or use an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter When taking photographs to be printed via direct USB connection set Color space to sRGB pg 167 231 BE Connecting the Printer Connect the camera using the supplied UC E4 USB cable 1 Select MTP PTP muss If the USB option in the camera setup menu has been changed from the y default setting of MTP PTP display the
292. the highlighted photograph full frame press and hold the amp button 339 4 select the highlighted E ase overlay photograph Image 1 Image2 Preview Press to select the highlighted photograph and return to the preview display Se The selected image will appear as Image 1 5 Set gain Image overlay Image 1 Image2 Preview Optimize exposure for the overlay by pressing A or W to select the gain for image 1 saat from values between 0 1 and XW Ozom __ Wselect 2 0 The default value is 1 0 selecting 0 5 cuts gain in half while selecting 2 0 doubles gain The effects of gain are visible in the Preview column 6 Select the second E mage overlay photograph Press lt or gt to highlight Image 2 Repeat Steps 2 5 to select the second photo and x0 5 X1 5 adjust gain 7 Highlight the Preview E imase overlay column D imaset Image2 Press lt 4 or gt to highlight the A i Preview column 2 Zoom 340 8 Preview the overlay GS mace overlay Overlay Press A or W to highlight si Overlay and press to save the overlay without displaying a preview highlight Save and press To return to Step 7 and select new photos or adjust gain press 9 9 savethe overlay Press while the preview is displayed to save the overlay After an overlay is created the resulting image will be displayed full frame in the monitor m Image O
293. the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help FC Nikon D300 CAUTIONS Modifications The FCC requires the user be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by Nikon Corporation may void the user s authority to operate the equipment Interface Cables Use the interface cables sold or provided by Nikon for your equipment Using other interface cables may exceed the limits of Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules Notice for Customers in the State of California WARNING Handling t
294. the final photograph In studio settings a standard gray panel can be used as a reference object Note that exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when measuring white balance in exposure mode adjust exposure so that the electronic analog exposure displays shows 0 pg 111 2 Set white balance to PRE Preset manual Press the WB button and rotate the main command dial until PRE is displayed in the control panel Control panel WB button Main command dial 3 Select direct measurement mode Pies 1 ig ETA PrE 4 wC gt Wee 2 Release the WB button briefly and then press the button until the PRE icon in the control panel and viewfinder start Control panel to flash A flashing will also appear ty in the control panel and viewfinder At 233TH default settings the displays will flash noe Za for about six seconds Viewfinder Measure white balance 7 Before the indicators stop flashing frame the ZN reference object so that it fills the viewfinder and press the shutter release button all the way down The camera will measure a value for white balance and store it in preset d 0 No photograph will be recorded white balance can be measured accurately even when the camera is not in focus Check the results If the camera was able to measure a value for white balance Saad will flash in the control panel while the viewfinder will show a flash
295. ting b3 Exp comp fine tune pg 275 For information on making adjustments to exposure compensation without pressing the 4 button see Custom Setting b4 Easy exposure compensation pg 276 115 116 Bracketing The D300 offers three types of bracketing exposure bracketing flash bracketing and white balance bracketing In exposure bracketing pg 117 the camera varies exposure compensation with each shot while in the case of flash bracketing pg 117 flash level is varied with each shot i TTL and in the case of the SB 900 and SB 800 auto aperture flash control modes only see pages 357 360 Only one photograph is produced each time the shutter is released meaning that several shots are required to complete the bracketing sequence Exposure and flash bracketing are recommended in situations in which it is difficult to set exposure and there is not enough time to check results and adjust settings with each shot In white balance bracketing pg 121 the camera creates multiple images each time the shutter is released each with a different white balance adjustment Only one shot is required to complete the bracketing sequence White balance bracketing is recommended when shooting under mixed lighting or experimenting with different white balance settings See Also At default settings the camera varies both exposure and flash level Custom Setting e5 Auto bracketing set pg 297 is used to choose the ty
296. tion in the setup menu The filter can be cleaned at any time using the Clean now option or cleaning can be performed automatically when the camera is turned on or off HE Clean Now 1 Place the camera base down Image sensor cleaning is most effective when the camera is placed base down as shown at right 2 Display the Clean image SETUP MENU Format memory card sensor menu J LD bristness Highlight Clean image sensor N prec armen in the setup menu and press gt e Language Image Sensor Cleaning If the options described in this section are not sufficient to remove dust or other foreign objects from the image sensor clean the sensor manually as described on page 376 373 374 3 Select Clean now Clean imase sensor Highlight Clean now and press gt The message shown at right will be displayed while cleaning is in progress Cleannow M Clean at startup shutdown fy ean image sensor Y 4 Cleaning image sensor The message shown at right E Clean imase sensor will be displayed when cleaning is complete HE Clean at Startup Shutdown 1 Select Clean at startup E Clean imase sensor shutdown a Y Clean now Display the Clean image f amp Clean at startup shutdown gt sensor menu as described in Step 2 on the previous page Highlight Clean at startup shutdown and press gt 2 Select an opt
297. tivity shooting menu settings are not reset when a two button reset pg 182 is performed Option Description Yes Restore defaults for the current shooting menu bank No default Exit without changing shooting menu settings 257 258 Active Folder Select the folder in which subsequent images will be stored BE New Folder Number 1 Select New folder BS Active folder E New folder number number Highlight New folder number and press gt Choose a folder number Press lt or gt to highlight a digit press A or W to change Ifa folder with the selected number already exists a D or icon will be displayed to the left of the folder number e Folder is empty Folder is partially full Folder contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered 9999 No further pictures can be stored in this folder Save changes and exit Press to complete the operation and return to the shooting menu to exit without changing the active folder press the MENU button If a folder with the specified number does not already exist a new folder will be created Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected folder unless it is already full HE Select Folder 1 Choose Select folder Active folder Select folder Highlight Select folder and ao press P is 2 Highlight a folder Press A or W to highlight a folder 3 Select the highlighted fold
298. to lock focus 69 Problem Solution Page Image size can not be changed Image quality set to NEF RAW 56 e Unlock focus selector lock 66 Auto area AF selected for focus 64 mode choose another mode _ e The camera is in playback mode 203 Can not select focus point The camera is in menu operation 245 e Press shutter release button 46 halfway to turn monitor off or activate exposure meters Camera is slow to record Turn long exposure noise reduction 262 photos off e Sound of mirror clicking down 82 when shutter release button was pressed halfway in hand held mode was mistaken for sound of shutter Photos not recorded in F i i Unless Release is chosen for 82 268 live view mode ae Custom Setting a2 AF S priority selection shutter release is disabled if camera is unable to focus when focus mode S is selected in hand held mode e Choose lower ISO sensitivity or 94 263 Randomly spaced bright turn high ISO noise reduction on pixels noise appearin Shutter speed is slower than 8 s 262 photos use long exposure noise reduction 385 386 Problem Solution Page Camera is in focus mode C 62 e Center focus point is not selected 64 for single point AF or dynamic area AF AF assist illuminator does Off selected for Custom Setting 273 not light a9 Built in AF assist illuminator Illuminator has turned of
299. ton dials while this setting is active FUNC button press will be set to None 303 BE FUNC Button Dials Selecting FUNC button dials for Custom Setting f4 displays the following options Option Description If the Fn button is pressed when the command dials are rotated changes to shutter speed nO 1stepspd exposure modes and M and aperture exposure aperture modes Ff and M are made in increments of 1 EV regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl pg 275 Choose non Press the Fn button and rotate a command dial to Non GPU CPU lens choose a lens number specified using the Non number CPU lens data option Press the Fn button and rotate the main command Auto dial to choose the number of shots in the BKT bracketing bracketing program Press the Fn button and default rotate the sub command dial to select bracketing increment If continuous servo AF focus mode G pg 62 is lt Dynamic AF selected when dynamic area AF 3 is chosen for Ce ares AF area mode pg 64 the number of focus points can be selected by pressing the Fn button and rotating either of the command dials pg 269 None No operation is performed when the command dials are rotated while the Fn button is pressed 304 f5 Assign Preview Button Choose the role played by the depth of field p Q preview button either by itself Preview button press or when used in
300. ture Control 164 iy Manage Picture Control g Delete from card F Delete Picture Control Y ta WONOCHROWE 02 No Active D Lighting Active D Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows creating photographs with natural contrast Use for high contrast scenes for example when photographing brightly lit outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of shaded subjects on a sunny day Active D Lighting High se gt Active D Lighting off Active D Lighting Normal Active D Lighting Low 165 To use active D Lighting 166 1 Select Active D Lighting SHOOTING MENU x White balance AUTO In the shooting menu pg 254 S highlight Active D Lighting N caner r and press P 7 S d 150 sensitivity settings g 2 Choosean option E Active Dlishtino a Highlight Off Low Normal Z G mih Hish or High and press Awe M Active D Lighting When Active D Lighting is on the capacity of the memory buffer drops and additional time is required to record images pg 406 Matrix metering is recommended pg 100 Although exposure is in fact reduced to prevent loss of detail in highlights and shadows highlights underexposed areas and mid tones are automatically adjusted to prevent the resulting photograph from being underexposed The Brightness and Contrast Picture Control settings pg 151 can not be adjusted while active D Lighting is in effect M
301. ty auto exposure a shutter speed of 250 s or faster other settings at default values and memory remaining in memory buffer Maximum frame advance rate when recording NEF RAW or NEF RAW JPEG pictures with 14 bit selected for NEF RAW recording gt NEF RAW bit depth pg 59 is 2 5 fps 2 Maximum frame advance rate with EN EL3e battery is 6 fps even when 7 fps is selected for Custom Setting d4 CL mode shooting speed pg 282 3 Maximum frame rate in continuous low speed mode is 7 fps If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings gt ISO sensitivity auto control in the shooting menu pg 96 maximum frame advance rate in continuous high speed mode is 7 5 fps 4 Frame rate slows at low temperatures and when batteries are low Buffer Size The approximate number of images that can be stored in the memory buffer at current settings is shown in the exposure count displays in the viewfinder and control panel while the shutter release button is pressed The illustration at right P5 56 2dfir3 3 shows the display when space remains in the buffer for about 37 pictures m P o5 L aC o anl F56 an Auto Image Rotation The camera orientation recorded for the first shot applies to all images in the same burst even if the camera is rotated during shooting See Auto Image Rotation pg 317 77 p 78 The Memory Buffer The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temp
302. ty pg 56 Image Size Choose the size at which pictures are recorded pg 60 JPEG Compression Choose whether to compress JPEG images to a fixed size or to vary file size for improved image quality pg 58 NEF RAW Recording Choose compression and bit depth options for NEF RAW images pg 58 White Balance Adjust white balance settings pg 126 Set Picture Control Select from the Picture Controls provided with the camera to instantly adjust image processing settings pg 146 Manage Picture Control Save and modify custom Picture Control combinations or copy custom Picture Controls to or from the memory card pg 154 Color Space Choose from sRGB and Adobe RGB color spaces pg 167 Active D Lighting This option can be used to prevent loss of detail in highlights and shadows pg 165 The default setting is Off 261 Long Exp NR Long Exposure Noise Reduction Choose whether to reduce noise in pictures taken at slow shutter speeds Option Description Photographs taken at shutter speeds slower than 8 s are processed to reduce noise While photographs are being processed the capacity of the memory buffer will drop yu Jab ar will blink in the shutter speed aperture displays for a period of time approximately equal to the current shutter speed In continuous release mode frame rates will slow and while photographs are being processed the capacity of the memory buffer wi
303. used to protect photographs from accidental deletion Protected files can not be deleted using the fi button or the Delete option in the playback menu Note that protected images will be deleted when the memory card is formatted pp 41 312 To protect a photograph 1 Select an image Display the image in full frame playback or playback zoom or highlight it in the thumbnail list 2 Press the On button The photograph will be marked with a icon To remove protection from the photograph so that it can be m deleted display the photograph or highlight it in the thumbnail list and then press the Om button Removing Protection from All Images To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently selected in the Playback folder menu press the O n and t buttons together for about two seconds 221 i Deleting Individual Photographs To delete the photograph displayed in full frame playback or the photograph highlighted in the thumbnail list press the t button Once deleted photographs can not be recovered 1 Select an image Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list 2 Press the T button 1 Delete A confirmation dialog will be displayed To delete the photograph press the i button again To exit without deleting the photograph press the P button See Also To delete multiple images use the
304. used to tone down the brightness Orange of the sky in landscape photographs Orange produces more Red contrast than yellow red more contrast than orange A D o lt Green Softens skin tones Can be used for portraits Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more pronounced than those produced by physical glass filters Toning Monochrome Only Pressing W when Toning is selected displays Monochrome saturation options Press lt or gt to adjust O peg saturation Saturation control is not available aaa when B amp W black and white is selected Filter effects Custom Picture Controls The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as those on which the custom Picure Control was based 153 154 Creating Custom Picture Controls The Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified and saved as custom Picture Controls 1 Select Manage Picture SHOOTING MENU Control SIROTIN gt In the shooting menu pg 254 En highlight Manage Picture iion Control and press gt Nv 4 EGE 2 Select Save edit Highlight Save edit and press Load save 3 Select a Picture Control E Choose Picture Control ED Standard Highlight an existing Picture a ENL Neutral Control and press or press E N Bean to proceed to step 5 to save a copy of the highlighted Xv Darid Adit Picture Control without further
305. verlay Only NEF RAW photographs created with the D300 can be selected for image overlay Other images are not displayed in the selection screen Only NEF RAW photographs with the same bit depth can be combined The overlay has the same photo info including date of recording metering shutter speed aperture exposure mode exposure compensation focal length and image orientation and values for white balance and picture control as the photograph selected for Image 1 Overlays saved in NEF RAW format use the compression selected for Type in the NEF RAW recording menu and have the same bit depth as the original images JPEG overlays are saved using size priority compression 341 342 Side by Side Comparison Compare retouched copies to the original photographs BE Making a Side by Side Comparison 1 Selecta picture Use the multi selector to select A4 a picture and press Only retouched copies shown by a Eicon or photographs that have been retouched can be selected 2 Select Side by side comparison WZ Highlight Side by side comparison and press MM O Side by side comparison Sancel 3 Compare the copy with the Options used to original create copy The source image is displayed on the left the retouched copy on the right with the options used to create the copy listed at the top of the display Press the multi selector in the direction indicated by the
306. w mode is selected In exposure modes other than manual cover the viewfinder with the supplied DK 5 eyepiece cap after focusing This prevents light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure pg 89 To reduce blur in tripod mode choose On for Custom Setting d9 Exposure delay mode pg 285 87 The Shooting Information Display To hide or display indicators in the monitor in live view mode press the button IINORMIALTO m S47 Shooting information on Monitor Brightness Monitor brightness can be adjusted by pressing the gt button while the view through the monitor is displayed Press A or W to adjust brightness note that monitor brightness has no effect on pictures taken in live view mode To return to live view release the amp button HDMI When the camera is attached to an HDMI video device the camera monitor will turn off and the video device will display the view through the lens as shown at right 88 Self Timer Mode The self timer can be used to reduce camera shake or for self portraits To use the self timer mount the camera on a tripod recommended or place the camera on a stable level surface and follow the steps below 1 Select self timer mode Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to Release mode dial 2 Frame the photograph and focus In single servo autofocus Focus mode sel
307. will only be adjusted if underexposure would result at the shutter speed selected for Minimum shutter speed 4000 1 s Slower shutter speeds may be used if optimum exposure can not be achieved at the ISO sensitivity value selected for Maximum sensitivity When On is selected the control panel Bp oG 55 gt and viewfinder show ISO AUTO When Jem o m sensitivity is altered from the value selected C l ggm SHT by the user these indicators blink and the altered value is shown in the viewfinder Auto ISO Sensitivity Control Noise is more likely at higher sensitivities Use the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise see page 263 When a flash is used the value selected for Minimum shutter speed is ignored in favor of the option selected for Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed pg 288 Foreground subjects may be underexposed in photos taken with the flash at slow shutter speeds in daylight or against a bright background Choose a flash mode other than slow sync or select exposure mode A or M and choose a larger aperture 97 98 Exposure Controlling How the Camera Sets Exposure This section describes the options available to control exposure including metering exposure mode exposure lock exposure compensation and bracketing MG Teri iirc ee e ee ea eatae Aree AeA E Exposure ModEe s sseeiee teeeseserseeteeteiceceestesatste treten co esene PiProgrammedAUtO eeta eeaeee aeea TEESE Eaa
308. wing topics Compatible Lenses iarccaccccecsecssescsrecsccesecsecossesezsssesecserse pg 350 Optional Flash Units Speedlights sssceeeeee pg 357 Other Accessories eeoa eeter neee eaten eass pg 365 Caring for the Camera cssssscsscsesesecsssssescecsssesesees pg 372 SUOLAG Gir rcccaninecari nemesis pg 372 CERIN G r ceeoromn rE pg 372 The LowPass FIE eee aree ccm ttn center pg 373 PEIN ON A E A pg 373 Clean at Startup Shutdown ssssssssssssssssssssssssssseessssssesssssse pg 374 MEIU IE EE LE rA S pg 376 Caring for the Camera and Battery Cautions pg 379 MNOUBDlESMOOCITIG ereere eset Eee Eiee AARET pg 383 EMrOniM SSAGES ccccccsccnccsscsestsecsoecnccsssseatenssccsscsnsccesssacceress pg 391 Jao ot late b Ceerere E E rye ere eee O pg 399 LAEE OI E A A pg 409 349 350 Compatible Lenses Camera setting Focus mode Exposure Metering system mode P M BEA c S M 3D Color CJ Lens accessory rangefinder Type G or D AF Nikkor 3 AF S AF I Nikkor VEEE Q PC E NIIKOR series v5 V 5 j v PC Micro 85mm f 2 8D v5 Y ji W ivi 4 3 AF S AF I Teleconverter vy ViVviVviVv 4 amp Other AF Nikkor 9 9 3 except lenses for F3AF K ERANA ihe Al P Nikkor vy V iV iVv4 l V v Al Al modified Nikkor or ii illya Nikon Series E lenses 2 A v EEEE Medical Nikkor 120m
309. xposures At a shutter speed of tis i i the shutter will remain open while the shutter release button is held down Use for long time exposure photographs of moving lights the stars night scenery or fireworks Nikon recommends using a fully charged EN EL3e battery or an AF optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter to prevent Shutter speed 35 s loss of power while the shutter is open Note Aperture f 25 that noise and color distortion may be present in long exposures before shooting choose On for the Long exp NR option in the shooting menu pg 262 See Also See Custom Setting f10 Reverse indicators pg 310 for information on reversing the electronic analog exposure display 111 112 Autoexposure AE Lock Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after metering exposure 1 Select center weighted or Metering selector spot metering pg 100 Matrix metering will not produce the desired results with autoexposure lock If using center weighted metering select the center focus point with the multi selector pg 66 OME 2 Lock exposure Position the subject in the selected focus point and press the shutter release button halfway With the shutter release button pressed halfway and the subject positioned in the focus point press the AE L AF L button to lock exposure and focus except in manual focus mode Confirm that the in focus
310. y or transfer to computer and print using ViewNxX version 1 2 0 or later or Capture NX version 1 3 5 or later or Capture NX 2 version 2 1 0 or later ae TV Choose correct video mode 313 photo 3 not displayed Confirm that HDMI cable available on high definition 244 video device separately is connected T photos Choose correct USB option 225 a AS Update software to latest version 368 Image sensor cleaning changes the position of dust on the low pass filter Dust off reference data recorded before Image Dust Off image sensor cleaning is performed can option in Capture NX 9t be used with photographs taken Opo 13 ae ot after image sensor cleaning is performed 319 have d deff Dust off reference data recorded after ave desired enect image sensor cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken before image sensor cleaning is performed Can not use Camera lt a USB to MTP PTP 225 Control Pro 2 Computer displays NEF RAW images differently from camera Third party software does not display effects of Picture Controls or active D Lighting Use ViewNX version 1 2 0 or later or optional Nikon software such as Capture NX version 1 3 5 or later or Capture NX 2 version 2 1 0 or later 389 HE Miscellaneous Problem Solution Page Dateof recordingiis Set camera clock 37 not correct Some options are not available at certain P combinations of settings or when no o cannOLne memory c
311. y after charging Batteries will lose their charge if left unused Index Menu items and options in the camera monitor are shown in brackets Symbols Single point AF 64 65 2J Dynamic area AF 64 65 269 f Auto area AF 64 65 S 62 68 74 268 CL 74 76 282 CH 74 76 y 79 Self timer 89 Mup 91 amp 3 Matrix 100 101 278 Center weighted 100 277 278 Spot 100 278 P Programmed auto 104 Shutter priority auto 106 Aperture priority auto 107 Manual 109 Help 24 29 rF Memory buffer 51 PRE Preset manual 127 134 Numerics 1 005 segment RGB sensor 126 3D color matrix metering II 100 101 3D tracking 64 270 A AC adapter 365 Accessories 365 Active D Lighting 165 Active folder 258 AE L 69 112 306 AF 62 64 66 70 AF activation 271 AF area brackets 11 AF assist 51 273 355 AF fine tune 327 AF point illumination 271 AF point selection 272 AF area mode 64 5 A m auto area AF 64 65 dynamic area AF 64 65 269 single point AF 64 65 AF C priority selection 267 AF ON button 63 83 AF On for MB D10 274 AF S priority selection 268 After delete 251 A M switch 34 Amber 130 338 Aperture 107 110 maximum 72 196 minimum 35 102 Aperture priority auto 107 Assign AE L AF L button 306 Assign FUNC button 302 Assign preview button 305 Auto bracketing

User`s Manual - MyNikon.com.pl

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents